GKD-C Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Fast Discrete Cosine Transform of Price
What is Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
Algolib is a C++ library for algorithmic trading that provides various algorithms for processing and analyzing financial data. The library includes a Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) implementation, which is a fast version of the Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) algorithm used for signal processing and data compression.
The FDCT implementation in Algolib is based on the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) algorithm, which is a widely used method for computing the DCT. The implementation is optimized for performance and can handle large datasets efficiently. It uses the standard divide-and-conquer approach to compute the DCT recursively and combines the resulting coefficients to obtain the final DCT of the input signal.
The input to the FDCT algorithm in Algolib is a one-dimensional array of real numbers, which represents a time series or a financial signal. The algorithm then computes the DCT of the input sequence and returns a one-dimensional array of DCT coefficients, which represent the frequency components of the signal.
The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses C++ templates to provide a generic implementation that can work with different data types. It also includes various optimizations, such as loop unrolling, to improve the performance of the algorithm.
The steps involved in the FDCT algorithm in Algolib are:
-Divide the input sequence into even and odd parts.
-Compute the DCT of the even and odd parts recursively.
-Combine the DCT coefficients of the even and odd parts to obtain the final DCT coefficients.
-The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses the FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West) library to perform the FFT computations, which is a highly optimized library for computing Fourier transforms.
In summary, the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform implementation in Algolib is a fast and efficient implementation of the DCT algorithm, which is used for processing financial signals and time series data. The implementation is optimized for performance and uses the FFT algorithm for fast computation. The implementation is generic and can work with different data types, and includes optimizations such as loop unrolling to improve the performance of the algorithm.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
This indicator has period lengths that are powers of powers of 2. There is also a features to increase the resolution of the FDCT.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
חפש סקריפטים עבור "entry"
GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Fast Discrete Cosine Transform
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform?
Algolib is a C++ library for algorithmic trading that provides various algorithms for processing and analyzing financial data. The library includes a Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) implementation, which is a fast version of the Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT) algorithm used for signal processing and data compression.
The FDCT implementation in Algolib is based on the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) algorithm, which is a widely used method for computing the DCT. The implementation is optimized for performance and can handle large datasets efficiently. It uses the standard divide-and-conquer approach to compute the DCT recursively and combines the resulting coefficients to obtain the final DCT of the input signal.
The input to the FDCT algorithm in Algolib is a one-dimensional array of real numbers, which represents a time series or a financial signal. The algorithm then computes the DCT of the input sequence and returns a one-dimensional array of DCT coefficients, which represent the frequency components of the signal.
The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses C++ templates to provide a generic implementation that can work with different data types. It also includes various optimizations, such as loop unrolling, to improve the performance of the algorithm.
The steps involved in the FDCT algorithm in Algolib are:
-Divide the input sequence into even and odd parts.
-Compute the DCT of the even and odd parts recursively.
-Combine the DCT coefficients of the even and odd parts to obtain the final DCT coefficients.
-The implementation of the FDCT algorithm in Algolib uses the FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West) library to perform the FFT computations, which is a highly optimized library for computing Fourier transforms.
In summary, the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform implementation in Algolib is a fast and efficient implementation of the DCT algorithm, which is used for processing financial signals and time series data. The implementation is optimized for performance and uses the FFT algorithm for fast computation. The implementation is generic and can work with different data types, and includes optimizations such as loop unrolling to improve the performance of the algorithm.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
What is the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is an algorithm used for signal processing and data compression that can also be applied in trading forex. The FDCT is used to transform financial data into a set of coefficients that represent the data in terms of cosine functions of different frequencies. These coefficients can be used to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and to develop trading strategies based on these components.
In trading forex, the FDCT can be applied to various financial signals, such as price data, volume data, and technical indicators. By applying the FDCT to these signals, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the signals and use this information to develop trading strategies.
For example, traders can use the FDCT to identify cycles in the market and use this information to develop trend-following strategies. The FDCT can also be used to identify short-term fluctuations in the market and develop mean-reversion strategies based on these fluctuations.
The FDCT can also be used in combination with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to improve the accuracy of trading signals. For example, traders can apply the FDCT to the moving average of a financial signal to identify the dominant frequency components of the moving average and use this information to develop trading signals.
The FDCT can also be used in conjunction with machine learning algorithms to develop predictive models for financial markets. By applying the FDCT to financial data and using the resulting coefficients as inputs to a machine learning algorithm, traders can develop models that predict future price movements and identify profitable trading opportunities.
In summary, the FDCT can be applied in trading forex to analyze the frequency components of financial signals and develop trading strategies based on these components. The FDCT can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and machine learning algorithms to improve the accuracy of trading signals and develop predictive models for financial markets.
█ Relative Strength Index (RSI)
This indicator contains 7 different types of RSI .
RSX
Regular
Slow
Rapid
Harris
Cuttler
Ehlers Smoothed
What is RSI?
RSI stands for Relative Strength Index . It is a technical indicator used to measure the strength or weakness of a financial instrument's price action.
The RSI is calculated based on the price movement of an asset over a specified period of time, typically 14 days, and is expressed on a scale of 0 to 100. The RSI is considered overbought when it is above 70 and oversold when it is below 30.
Traders and investors use the RSI to identify potential buy and sell signals. When the RSI indicates that an asset is oversold, it may be considered a buying opportunity, while an overbought RSI may signal that it is time to sell or take profits.
It's important to note that the RSI should not be used in isolation and should be used in conjunction with other technical and fundamental analysis tools to make informed trading decisions.
What is RSX?
Jurik RSX is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index Smoothed ( RSX ) indicator. It was developed by Mark Jurik and is designed to help traders identify trends and momentum in the market.
The Jurik RSX uses a combination of the RSX indicator and an adaptive moving average (AMA) to smooth out the price data and reduce the number of false signals. The adaptive moving average is designed to adjust the smoothing period based on the current market conditions, which makes the indicator more responsive to changes in price.
The Jurik RSX can be used to identify potential trend reversals and momentum shifts in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend . Traders can use these levels to make trading decisions, such as buying when the indicator crosses above 50 and selling when it crosses below 50.
The Jurik RSX is a more advanced version of the RSX indicator, and while it can be useful in identifying potential trade opportunities, it should not be used in isolation. It is best used in conjunction with other technical and fundamental analysis tools to make informed trading decisions.
What is Slow RSI?
Slow RSI is a variation of the traditional Relative Strength Index ( RSI ) indicator. It is a more smoothed version of the RSI and is designed to filter out some of the noise and short-term price fluctuations that can occur with the standard RSI .
The Slow RSI uses a longer period of time than the traditional RSI , typically 21 periods instead of 14. This longer period helps to smooth out the price data and makes the indicator less reactive to short-term price fluctuations.
Like the traditional RSI , the Slow RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Slow RSI is a more conservative version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also be slower to respond to changes in price, which may result in missed trading opportunities. Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Slow RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Rapid RSI?
Same as regular RSI but with a faster calculation method
What is Harris RSI?
Harris RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by Larry Harris and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Harris RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It takes into account both the opening and closing prices of a financial instrument, as well as the high and low prices. The Harris RSI is also normalized to a range of 0 to 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend .
Like the traditional RSI , the Harris RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Harris RSI is a more advanced version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Harris RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Cuttler RSI?
Cuttler RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by Curt Cuttler and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Cuttler RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It takes into account the difference between the closing price of a financial instrument and the average of the high and low prices over a specified period of time. This difference is then normalized to a range of 0 to 100, with values above 50 indicating a bullish trend and values below 50 indicating a bearish trend .
Like the traditional RSI , the Cuttler RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Cuttler RSI is a more advanced version of the RSI and can be useful in identifying longer-term trends in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Cuttler RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
What is Ehlers Smoothed RSI?
Ehlers smoothed RSI is a technical analysis indicator that is a variation of the Relative Strength Index ( RSI ). It was developed by John Ehlers and is designed to help traders identify potential trend changes and momentum shifts in the market.
The Ehlers smoothed RSI uses a different calculation formula compared to the traditional RSI . It uses a smoothing algorithm that is designed to reduce the noise and random fluctuations that can occur with the standard RSI . The smoothing algorithm is based on a concept called "digital signal processing" and is intended to improve the accuracy of the indicator.
Like the traditional RSI , the Ehlers smoothed RSI is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in the market. It oscillates between 0 and 100, with values above 70 indicating overbought conditions and values below 30 indicating oversold conditions. Traders often use these levels as potential buy and sell signals.
The Ehlers smoothed RSI can be useful in identifying longer-term trends and momentum shifts in the market. However, it can also generate more false signals than the standard RSI . Traders may choose to use a combination of both the Ehlers smoothed RSI and the traditional RSI to make informed trading decisions.
█ GKD-C RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform
What is the RSI of Fast Discrete Cosine Transform in terms of Forex trading?
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a popular technical indicator used in trading forex to measure the strength of a trend and identify potential trend reversals. While the Fast Discrete Cosine Transform (FDCT) is not directly related to the RSI, it can be used to analyze the frequency components of the price data used to calculate the RSI and improve its accuracy.
The RSI is calculated by comparing the average gains and losses of a financial instrument over a given period of time. The RSI value ranges from 0 to 100, with values above 70 indicating an overbought market and values below 30 indicating an oversold market.
One limitation of the RSI is that it only considers the average gains and losses over a fixed period of time, which may not capture the complex patterns and dynamics of financial markets. This is where the FDCT can be useful.
By applying the FDCT to the price data used to calculate the RSI, traders can identify the dominant frequency components of the price data and use this information to adjust the RSI calculation. For example, traders can weight the gains and losses based on the frequency components identified by the FDCT, giving more weight to the dominant frequencies and less weight to the lower frequencies.
This approach can improve the accuracy of the RSI calculation and provide traders with more reliable signals for identifying trends and potential trend reversals. Traders can also use the frequency components identified by the FDCT to develop more advanced trading strategies, such as identifying cycles in the market and using this information to develop trend-following strategies.
In summary, while the FDCT is not directly related to the RSI, it can be used to analyze the frequency components of the price data used to calculate the RSI and improve its accuracy. Traders can use the FDCT to identify dominant frequency components and adjust the RSI calculation accordingly, providing more reliable signals for identifying trends and potential trend reversals.
This indicator has period lengths that are powers of powers of 2. There is also a features to increase the resolution of the FDCT.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-V Hurst Exponent [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Hurst Exponent is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Vortex
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Hurst Exponent
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What is the Hurst Exponent?
The Hurst exponent is a statistical measure that describes the degree of long-term memory in a time series data, including forex trading data. It is used to identify the persistence or anti-persistence of the data over different time horizons.
In forex trading, the Hurst exponent can be used to identify the degree of trendiness in price movements. When the Hurst exponent is above 0.5, it indicates that the price movements have a persistent or trending behavior, while a Hurst exponent below 0.5 suggests that the price movements are anti-persistent or mean-reverting in nature.
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is another technical indicator used in forex trading that is related to the Hurst exponent. The FDI measures the degree of self-similarity or fractal dimension of the price movements over different time horizons. A high FDI indicates that the price movements are more self-similar and fractal-like, while a low FDI suggests that the price movements are less self-similar and more random in nature.
The Hurst exponent and the FDI are related because they both measure the degree of persistence or anti-persistence in price movements. In fact, the Hurst exponent can be calculated from the FDI using a simple formula. The formula relates the Hurst exponent to the FDI through the expression H = 2 - FDI.
Traders can use the Hurst exponent and the FDI in conjunction with other technical indicators to identify trading opportunities in the forex market. For example, a trader may use a high Hurst exponent or a high FDI to identify a strong trend and use a trend-following strategy. Conversely, a low Hurst exponent or a low FDI may suggest a potential trend reversal, prompting the trader to use a mean-reversion strategy.
In summary, the Hurst exponent and the FDI are two technical indicators that measure the degree of persistence or anti-persistence in price movements in the forex market. They are related because they both measure the fractal-like behavior of the price movements over different time horizons. Traders can use these indicators in combination with other technical analysis techniques to identify trading opportunities and manage risk.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau Ergodic MACD as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau Ergodic MACD
The Blau Ergodic MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by William Blau. It is a modification of the traditional MACD indicator, designed to provide a smoother and more responsive moving average calculation. The Blau Ergodic MACD incorporates the concept of Ergodicity, which is a mathematical concept that describes the long-term behavior of a system. The Ergodicity principle is used to filter out market noise and provide a clearer representation of the underlying trend.
The Blau Ergodic MACD consists of two lines, the Blau line and the signal line. The Blau line is calculated as the difference between two exponential moving averages (EMAs) that are smoothed using the Ergodicity principle. The signal line is a moving average of the Blau line. When the Blau line crosses above the signal line, it is considered a bullish signal, while a bearish signal is generated when the Blau line crosses below the signal line.
The Blau Ergodic MACD is a useful tool for traders and investors to identify potential trend reversals and to make informed trading decisions. It is particularly useful in volatile markets, where traditional technical indicators may be less effective.
This indicator includes both the Blau Ergodic MACD and the Blau MACD. The regular MACD is a zero-line cross, the Ergodic version is described above.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator
What is OMA?
Adaptive, One More Moving Average (OMA) is an adaptive moving average created by Mladen Rakic that changes shape with volatility and momentum
The usual story goes something like this : which is the best moving average? Everyone that ever started to do any kind of technical analysis was pulled into this "game". Comparing, testing, looking for new ones, testing ...
The idea of this one is simple: it should not be itself, but it should be a kind of a chameleon - it should "imitate" as much other moving averages as it can. So the need for zillion different moving averages would diminish. And it should have some extra, of course:
The extras:
it has to be smooth
it has to be able to "change speed" without length change
it has to be able to adapt or not (since it has to "imitate" the non-adaptive as well as the adaptive ones)
The steps:
Smoothing - compared are the simple moving average (that is the basis and the first step of this indicator - a smoothed simple moving average with as little lag added as it is possible and as close to the original as it is possible) Speed 1 and non-adaptive are the reference for this basic setup.
Speed changing - same chart only added one more average with "speeds" 2 and 3 (for comparison purposes only here)
Finally - adapting : same chart with SMA compared to one more average with speed 1 but adaptive (so this parameters would make it a "smoothed adaptive simple average") Adapting part is a modified Kaufman adapting way and this part (the adapting part) may be a subject for changes in the future (it is giving satisfactory results, but if or when I find a better way, it will be implemented here)
Some comparisons for different speed settings (all the comparisons are without adaptive turned on, and are approximate. Approximation comes from a fact that it is impossible to get exactly the same values from only one way of calculation, and frankly, I even did not try to get those same values).
speed 0.5 - T3 (0.618 Tilson)
speed 2.5 - T3 (0.618 Fulks/Matulich)
speed 1 - SMA , harmonic mean
speed 2 - LWMA
speed 7 - very similar to Hull and TEMA
speed 8 - very similar to LSMA and Linear regression value
Parameters:
Length - length (period) for averaging
Source - price to use for averaging
Speed - desired speed (i limited to -1.5 on the lower side but it even does not need that limit - some interesting results with speeds that are less than 0 can be achieved)
Adaptive - does it adapt or not
What is OMA Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator?
We refer to the Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator (ECO) as a momentum indicator, which considers the candlestick body's size and direction. It is a reliable and smooth momentum indicator because it is not affected by price gaps, unlike other momentum indicators. It can be used to confirm or define trends, and we use it as an alternative to weekly indicators. To determine the trend, you can look at the indicator's location relative to the "0" line, where above "0" indicates an uptrend and below "0" indicates a downtrend. Additionally, the slope and crossing points of the slow and fast lines can be used as an additional qualifier. When the ECO is below "0," only short signals from the Hi-Lo Activator should be taken, and when it is above "0," only long signals should be taken.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Blau T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average ( EMA ) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average , which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp (-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is T3 Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator?
We refer to the Ergodic Candlestick Oscillator (ECO) as a momentum indicator, which considers the candlestick body's size and direction. It is a reliable and smooth momentum indicator because it is not affected by price gaps, unlike other momentum indicators. It can be used to confirm or define trends, and we use it as an alternative to weekly indicators. To determine the trend, you can look at the indicator's location relative to the "0" line, where above "0" indicates an uptrend and below "0" indicates a downtrend. Additionally, the slope and crossing points of the slow and fast lines can be used as an additional qualifier. When the ECO is below "0," only short signals from the Hi-Lo Activator should be taken, and when it is above "0," only long signals should be taken.
The difference here is that instead of using a regular old SMA or EMA, we use T3 for the double smoothing and signal.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter
Confirmation 1: Grucha Percentage Index as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C Grucha Percentage Index
The Grucha Percentage Index finds the difference between open and close prices and then runs a comparison based on whether the difference is positive or negative. This indicator has three types of signals:
1. Trigger line cross over 50 line
2. Signal line cross over 50 line
3. Trigger over/under signal line crosses
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: FDI-Adaptive Supertrend as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-C FDI-Adaptive Supertrend
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a measure of the complexity or irregularity of a geometric shape or pattern. It is a mathematical concept that quantifies the degree of self-similarity or self-affinity of an object at different scales. The FDI is a real number that represents the scaling behavior of an object in a particular space, and it can be used to characterize a wide range of natural and synthetic phenomena, from coastlines to fractal art.
The FDI is based on the concept of fractals, which are objects that exhibit self-similar or self-affine patterns at different scales. Fractals are characterized by their fractional dimensionality, which is a non-integer number that describes their complexity. The FDI is a measure of this fractional dimensionality, and it can be calculated using a variety of mathematical techniques, including box counting, wavelet analysis, and Fourier analysis.
In practical terms, the FDI can be used to quantify the complexity or roughness of natural surfaces, such as soil or rock, as well as the irregularity of synthetic materials, such as concrete or ceramics. It is also used in image analysis and pattern recognition to characterize the complexity of digital images and to detect patterns that are difficult to discern with traditional methods.
In forex trading, the Fractal Dimension Index (FDI) is a technical indicator used to analyze market trends and price movements. The FDI is calculated based on the fractal geometry of price charts and is used to identify support and resistance levels, as well as potential changes in trend direction.
The FDI indicator works by measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements. Fractals are self-similar or self-affine patterns that repeat at different scales, and they can be used to identify key levels of support and resistance in the market. The FDI indicator calculates the fractal dimension of price movements over a specified time period, and it plots the result as a line on the price chart.
Traders use the FDI indicator to identify potential trend changes and to confirm trend direction. When the FDI line crosses above or below a key level, such as 1.5, it may indicate a potential trend reversal. Additionally, when the FDI line is trending in the same direction as the price, it can confirm the current trend and provide additional confidence for traders.
Overall, the Fractal Dimension Index is a technical indicator that can be used to analyze market trends and price movements in forex trading. By measuring the fractal dimensionality of price movements, traders can identify potential support and resistance levels and confirm trend direction.
What is Supertrend?
Supertrend is a popular technical indicator used in trading to identify trends in the market. It is a trend-following indicator that helps traders to identify the direction of the market trend and to enter or exit trades accordingly.
The Supertrend indicator is based on the Average True Range (ATR) and the price action of an asset. It plots a line on the price chart that follows the trend of the asset and indicates potential support and resistance levels. The Supertrend line changes its color when the trend changes, which can be used as a signal to enter or exit trades.
The Supertrend indicator is used to identify both long-term and short-term trends in the market. When the Supertrend line is above the price, it indicates a downtrend, and when it is below the price, it indicates an uptrend. Traders can use the Supertrend indicator to identify potential entry and exit points for their trades, as well as to set stop-loss orders and take-profit levels.
Supertrend is a popular indicator among traders because it is easy to use and can be applied to a variety of markets and timeframes. However, like any technical indicator, it is not perfect and can produce false signals in certain market conditions. Therefore, it is important to use the Supertrend indicator in combination with other indicators and to have a solid trading strategy in place.
What is FDI-Adaptive Supertrend?
FDI-Adaptive Supertrend uses FDI to adapt the period inputs into Supertrend to make Supertrend FDI-adaptive.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter is a Volatility/Volume module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Damiani Volatmeter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Fisher Transform
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Damiani Volatmeter
Damiani Volatmeter is a volatility measurement indicator to determine whether volatility is high enough to trade.
Anything red means that volatility is low. Remember volatility doesn't have a direction. Anything green means volatility high despite the direction of price. The core signal line here is the green and red line that dips below two while threshold lines to "recharge". Maximum recharge happen when the core signal line shows a yellow ping. Soon after one or many yellow pings you should expect a massive upthrust of volatility . The idea here is you don't trade unless volatility is rising or green. This means that the Volatmeter has to dip into the recharge zone, recharge and then spike upward. You can also attempt to buy or sell reversals with confluence indicators when volatility is in the recharge zone, but I wouldn't recommend this. However, if you so choose to do this, then use the following indicator for confluence.
And last reminder, volatility doesn't have a direction! Red doesn't mean short, and green doesn't mean long, Red means don't trade period regardless of direction long/short, and green means trade no matter the direction long/short. This means you'll have to add an indicator that does show direction such as a mean reversion indicator like Fisher Transform or a Gaussian Filter. You can search my public scripts for various Fisher Transform and Gaussian Filter indicators.
Requirements
Inputs
Chained: GKD-B Baseline
Solo: NA, no inputs
Outputs
Chained: GKD-C indicators Confirmation 1 or Solo Confirmation Complex
Solo: GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Adaptive Parabolic SAR is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Adaptive Parabolic SAR
The Parabolic SAR indicator typically uses a fixed acceleration factor and step to calculate its values, which can result in false signals or inefficient performance in certain market conditions. The Adaptive Parabolic SAR attempts to address this issue by dynamically adjusting its acceleration factor and step based on the current market volatility and price movement.
The Adaptive Parabolic SAR uses an algorithm that is designed to adjust the acceleration factor and step in real-time based on the recent price action. This allows the indicator to be more responsive to changes in the market, while still maintaining its ability to provide reliable signals.
The indicator works by plotting a series of dots above or below the price bars, depending on the direction of the trend. When the dots are below the price bars, it indicates a bullish trend, and when the dots are above the price bars, it indicates a bearish trend. The dots also move closer to the price bars as the trend becomes stronger, and further away as the trend weakens.
Traders can use the Adaptive Parabolic SAR as a tool to identify potential trend reversals or to confirm the current trend. It is often used in conjunction with other technical indicators and price action analysis to develop trading strategies.
The Kaufman adaptivity uses efficiency ratio to adapt PSAR while the Ehlers adaptivity uses raw Momentum.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
? Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
? GKD-V EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother
The EMA-Deviation-Corrected Super Smoother is a type of filter that is designed to remove noise and provide a smoother representation of data. It is based on the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and uses a deviation correction technique to improve its accuracy. The result is a more precise and reliable signal that can be used for a variety of applications, such as technical analysis in trading or data smoothing in scientific research.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA w/ DSL
Fractal-Dimension-Adaptive SMA (FDASMA) w/ DSL is a fractal-dimension-index-adaptive SMA . The SMA is accelerated during a trend and slowed down during a sideways market, so as to avoid false signals. This indicator uses the fractal dimension to compute an ingest period length into the SMA to output the FDASMA.
What is the Fractal Dimension Index?
The goal of the fractal dimension index is to determine whether the market is trending or in a trading range. It does not measure the direction of the trend. A value less than 1.5 indicates that the price series is persistent or that the market is trending. Lower values of the FDI indicate a stronger trend. A value greater than 1.5 indicates that the market is in a trading range and is acting in a more random fashion.
What are DSL Discontinued Signal Line?
A lot of indicators are using signal lines in order to determine the trend (or some desired state of the indicator) easier. The idea of the signal line is easy : comparing the value to it's smoothed (slightly lagging) state, the idea of current momentum/state is made.
Discontinued signal line is inheriting that simple signal line idea and it is extending it : instead of having one signal line, more lines depending on the current value of the indicator.
"Signal" line is calculated the following way :
When a certain level is crossed into the desired direction, the EMA of that value is calculated for the desired signal line
When that level is crossed into the opposite direction, the previous "signal" line value is simply "inherited" and it becomes a kind of a level
This way it becomes a combination of signal lines and levels that are trying to combine both the good from both methods.
In simple terms, DSL uses the concept of a signal line and betters it by inheriting the previous signal line's value & makes it a level.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C ATR-Stepped PDFMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Jurik DMX as shown on the chart
Confirmation 1: GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V ATR-Stepped PDFMA
ATR-Stepped PDF MA is and ATR-stepped moving average that uses a probability density function moving average.
What is Probability Density Function?
Probability Density Function (PDF) is a statistical function used to describe the likelihood of a continuous random variable taking on a particular value or range of values. In other words, it describes the probability distribution of a random variable over a continuous range of values.
The PDF is defined as the derivative of the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of a continuous random variable. The CDF of a continuous random variable is the probability that the random variable takes on a value less than or equal to a given value. The PDF is a non-negative function that integrates to 1 over the entire range of the random variable.
The PDF is used to calculate the probability of the random variable taking on a value within a specific range. This is done by integrating the PDF over that range. The height of the PDF at a particular value of the random variable indicates the relative likelihood of that value occurring.
The PDF is an essential tool in many areas of statistics, including hypothesis testing, confidence interval estimation, and Bayesian inference.
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C T3 Velocity [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C T3 Velocity is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the Stochastic Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V T3 Velocity as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V T3 Velocity
What is T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average (EMA) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average, which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp(-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3 ) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is Velocity?
Velocity can have different meanings depending on the context. Here are a few definitions:
In physics, velocity is a measure of the rate and direction of motion of an object. It is typically expressed in meters per second (m/s) or another unit of distance divided by time.
In finance and economics, velocity refers to the speed at which money circulates in an economy. It is usually measured as the ratio of gross domestic product (GDP) to the money supply.
In trading, velocity can refer to the speed and magnitude of price movements. It can be used as an indicator of momentum or trend strength.
What is T3 Velocity?
T3 Velocity is a better performing MACD that uses different hot (alpha) values for the slow and fast period inputs.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Swing Line [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Swing Line is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Swing Line as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Swing Line
The swing line indicator is a technical analysis tool used in financial markets to identify the direction of a trend. It is also known as the trendline or zigzag indicator.
The swing line indicator plots a series of lines connecting the highs and lows of price movements over a given time period. Each line represents a swing high or swing low in the price action, depending on whether the trend is bullish or bearish.
In an uptrend, the swing line indicator connects each successive higher low, forming an ascending trendline. In a downtrend, the indicator connects each successive lower high, forming a descending trendline. When the trend changes direction, the indicator will create a new line to reflect the new swing high or low.
Traders use the swing line indicator to identify key levels of support and resistance, as well as potential entry and exit points for trades. A break of the trendline can signal a potential trend reversal, while a bounce off the trendline can indicate that the trend is still intact.
The swing line indicator can be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as moving averages, to confirm trends and reduce false signals. It is commonly used in forex, stock, and commodity markets, and is available on most charting platforms.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Smoother [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-V Jurik Smoother is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Jurik Smoother as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ GKD-V Jurik Smoother
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a smoothing function that reduces noise and false signals in price data. It is based on a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This helps to eliminate sudden price spikes and gaps in the data, making it easier to identify trends and patterns.
Jurik Smoother (JS) is a type of oscillator that was developed by Mark Jurik to reduce the noise and false signals that can be present in financial data. It is designed to be more responsive to changes in price trends than traditional oscillators, while also being less susceptible to whipsaw signals.
The Jurik Smoother is calculated using a weighted moving average that assigns more weight to recent data points and less weight to older data points. This means that it places greater emphasis on current price action, while smoothing out any erratic movements that could be caused by random fluctuations in the data.
One of the key features of the Jurik Smoother is its ability to adapt to changing market conditions. Unlike traditional oscillators, which use a fixed number of data points in their calculation, the Jurik Smoother adjusts its length based on the current volatility of the market. This helps to reduce lag time and increase the accuracy of the indicator in identifying trends.
The Jurik Smoother can be used in a variety of ways, including identifying trends, support and resistance levels, and potential entry and exit points for trades. It is particularly useful in markets that are prone to sudden price spikes and gaps, such as cryptocurrency and forex markets.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Volatility Ratio
Confirmation 1: Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
█ Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA
What is Jurik Filter?
The Jurik Filter is a technical analysis tool that is used to filter out market noise and identify trends in financial markets. It was developed by Mark Jurik in the 1990s and is based on a non-linear smoothing algorithm that provides a more accurate representation of price movements.
Traditional moving averages, such as the Simple Moving Average (SMA) or Exponential Moving Average (EMA), are linear filters that produce a lag between price and the moving average line. This can cause false signals during periods of market volatility, which can result in losses for traders and investors.
The Jurik Filter is designed to address this issue by incorporating a damping factor into the smoothing algorithm. This damping factor adjusts the filter's responsiveness to the changes in price, allowing it to filter out market noise without overshooting price peaks and valleys.
The Jurik Filter is calculated using a mathematical formula that takes into account the current and past prices of an asset, as well as the volatility of the market. This formula incorporates the damping factor and produces a smoother price curve than traditional moving average filters.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Filter is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Filter in conjunction with other technical analysis tools, such as the MACD or RSI, to confirm or complement their trading strategies. By filtering out market noise and identifying trends in the financial markets, the Jurik Filter can help improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
Overall, the Jurik Filter is a powerful technical analysis tool that can help traders and investors make more informed decisions about buying and selling securities. By providing a smoother price curve and reducing false signals, it can help improve trading performance and reduce risk in volatile markets.
What is Jurik Volatility?
Jurik Volatility is a technical analysis indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the volatility of financial markets. It is designed to provide a more accurate measure of market volatility than other traditional volatility indicators, such as the Average True Range (ATR) or Standard Deviation.
The Jurik Volatility indicator uses a non-linear smoothing algorithm that filters out market noise and provides a more accurate representation of price movements. It is calculated by taking the difference between the current price and a moving average of prices, and then applying a damping factor to adjust the responsiveness of the indicator to changes in volatility.
The damping factor used in the Jurik Volatility indicator adjusts the speed at which the indicator responds to changes in volatility. This makes it more responsive during periods of high volatility and less responsive during periods of low volatility. This helps to filter out false signals and provides a more accurate representation of market volatility.
One of the advantages of the Jurik Volatility indicator is its ability to adjust to changing market conditions. The damping factor can be adjusted to suit different securities and time frames, making it a versatile tool for traders and investors.
Traders and investors often use the Jurik Volatility indicator to identify periods of high and low volatility in financial markets. It can help traders to adjust their trading strategies to suit different market conditions, and to manage their risk by adjusting their stop loss orders or position sizes.
Overall, the Jurik Volatility indicator is a useful tool for traders and investors who want to measure market volatility and make informed decisions about buying and selling securities. It can help to improve the accuracy of trading signals and reduce the risks of false signals during periods of market volatility.
What is the EMA?
The Exponential Moving Average (EMA) is a popular technical analysis indicator that gives more weight to recent price data than older data. It is a type of moving average that is calculated by applying a weighting factor to the price data based on the number of periods selected for the EMA calculation.
The formula for calculating the EMA is:
EMA = (Price(t) x Smoothing factor) + EMA(y) x (1 - Smoothing factor)
where:
-Price(t) is the current price
-EMA(y) is the EMA value for the previous period
-Smoothing factor = 2 / (Number of periods + 1)
The smoothing factor is used to give more weight to recent prices and less weight to older prices, with the weight decreasing exponentially over time. This makes the EMA more responsive to price changes than a simple moving average.
The EMA can be used to identify trend direction and potential reversals in the market. Traders often use EMAs of different periods to confirm trend direction and make trading decisions.
What is Jurik Volatility Adaptive EMA?
This indicator combines Jurik Filter with Jurik Volatility to form an crete an alpha value that is then injected into the EMA calculation to create an adaptive EMA.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1 and Solo Confirmation: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Outputs
Confirmation 2 and Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-E Exit indicator
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest strategy
Additional features will be added in future releases.
Strategy Developer ToolSolar Strategies: Strategy Developer Tool Complete Guide
This guide provides full explanation of the intended purpose of our script along with individual explanation of each input and the logic behind them coupled with general knowledge which we find useful in using our tool regarding elements of risk and strategy. Use this information wisely and understand we are not providing financial advise, this is a learning tool meant to help advance traders knowledge of the markets and their strategies which are formed as such.
Basics
Before getting into the specifics of how to use our strategy developer tool, it's important to understand a few basic fundamental things about it. The purpose of the tool is to allow the user to optimize a strategy through back testing with our strategy tracker and 50+ user inputs. The way you optimize your strategy depends on a couple things:
The state of the current and recent previous market.
The timeframe you trade on.
The types of trades you prefer. (swings, scalps, etc.)
How much risk you are willing to take on.
Risk Basics:
Going off the last bullet point on the list above, risk plays a huge part in how you optimize your strategy, with that being said here are a few general rules of risk as they relate to trades:
The more trades you take on, the more risk you are opening your strategy up to.
If done correctly, more trades will often result in more profit with slightly lower accuracy, and more risk.
The less trades you take on, the easier it is to have higher accuracy because ideally by rooting out the losing trades, you are left with fewer overall trades but mostly winning trades.
Less trades with higher accuracy often result in less profit but will 100% be less risky than the opposite. (More trades, less accurate, more profit, MORE RISK)
Input Basics:
More trades, less trades, more risk, less risk, what does this all mean as it relates to our tool?
The 50+ user inputs that allow you to optimize and create your strategy all effect when the script takes a trade.
Many of the inputs are essentially conditions. By changing these inputs, what you are doing is changing how specific the conditions need to be in order to take a trade.
This is how the inputs tie into the bullet point list above regarding risk and the number of trades you take on. By raising or lowering certain inputs, you are making the conditions more or less specific on when to trade.
Making conditions more specific will allow for less trades to be taken and will often result in a higher win rate, and less associated risk.
Making conditions less specific will allow for more trades to be taken and depending on the state of the market, could result in more profit being realized, but at the same time opens you up to more risk because you are stating a more general set of conditions in order to take a trade.
How does it work?
Our strategy developer tool is based on two simple factors in order to identify specific areas in the market deemed good for trade. They are as follows:
Directional momentum to identify when a move might happen.
A confirmation of the desired move.
Indicators:
The tool gets its information on these two factors from two custom built indicators which are hard coded into the script. These two indicators and the inputs which affect them can be found labeled with Indicator 1 or Indicator 2 in the tool's settings.
When the conditions are met based on the factors of both indicators, it then decides your stop losses and take profits using pivot points.
Indicator 1 is the momentum indicator.
Indicator 2 looks for confirmation of the move.
Hedges:
Since nothing is ever certain when trading, our tool also aims to minimize potential loss before it can happen by incorporating hedges when a signal prints in the opposite direction of the trade you are currently in.
To identify when to hedge, the candles will appear with the opposite color of your original trade. Candles, while in a long trade, appear as green and candles while in a short trade appear as red. While in a long trade the only time red candles will appear is when a hedge occurs and vice versa for shorts.
Example: If you just took a long trade based on a long signal that the script gave off, but a short signal prints off while you are in the long, you are directed to sell half your long position and enter that half into a short position. Since there is now more uncertainty in the long because of the short signal, minimizing your position size and having a smaller position in the opposite direction allows you to cover your bases if the trade moves against you. If it doesn’t move against you and ends up going long as originally intended, you are not to lose any money, likely a small profit or break even when all is said and done.
In order to give the hedges a greater change of hitting, the take profits are smaller than a normal trade, this way even if your hedge wasn’t necessary and the original trade does not move against you, it's likely that your hedge will still win, and you can just consider it a small scalp to further your profits on the original trade.
Doubles:
Besides minimizing loss, we also aim to maximize the potential gain. When a second signal prints off in the direction of the trade you are currently already in, the tool directs you to double your position size.
The signal for doubling is a label with “2x” written inside.
The logic here is similar to hedging but in the opposite way. Just as a signal in the opposite direction creates uncertainty, a signal in the same direction indicates more certainty hence doubling your position size.
Example: If you are currently in a long position and you get a second long signal, you would then double your existing position since two long signals printing off before the first one has a chance to play out indicates a stronger chance of movement in the intended direction of your trade.
User Inputs
Upon opening the tools settings tab, you will find all the user inputs which can then be modified to fit your desired strategy. In this section of our guides, you will find individual explanations and use cases for each input so you can correctly use them to your best advantage.
Strategy Tracker Table:
By ticking this input on, the strategy tracker table will be visible to the user. (Default is on)
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long:
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement on the timeframe of the market being observed, making a long position riskier.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Long:
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Long
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a long position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a long position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of longing as the market has started to pull back from a peak or when the market has just reached a peak.
Indicator 1 Less Than Input: Long
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Long is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a long position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall above a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too low because this would indicate prolonged downwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at lower levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market has started to recover from a bottom or when the market has just reached a bottom.
Indicator 1 Greater Than Input: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Greater Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall above the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
By ticking this input on, you are adding a condition the script will then look for in order to take a short position. (Default is on)
This condition is that an average of indicator 1, which searches for momentum, must fall below a certain level, which is determined in the next input.
The purpose of this is to ensure that the average momentum is not too high, because this would indicate a prior significant upwards movement or trend on the timeframe of the market being observed.
Taking a short position while the average momentum is at higher levels exposes the risk of shorting as the market is currently in a strong uptrend.
Indicator 1 Less Than: Short
This input correlates to the previous input directly above.
If Indicator 1 Less Than: Short is ticked on, then one of the conditions in order to take a short position will be that the average of indicator 1 must fall below the level which you set in this input.
max level 100, min level 0
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short
This grouping of inputs is best used as a filter of sorts, much like many of the other inputs which are also essentially filters of the market to find areas ripe for trade. Specifically, however, this group of inputs is especially powerful because if used correctly, it can specify a range for the average momentum to fall in when looking for either long or short trades. Think of it like a sweet spot where the average is not too high nor too low. In combination with the numerous other inputs which will shortly be explained, this sweet spot can be a great indication. Keep in mind that once you find a working range, this will not last forever. Conditions in the market are ever changing and as such your inputs, in this case the range the average momentum must fall in, will also need to change with the market conditions.
Bars Since Crossover:
This input simply describes a crossover of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when an upwards move might happen. The crossover correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired upwards move. This confirmation is a crossover of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossover is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossover of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossover input is set to 10. This means that the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a long position.
Bars Since Crossunder:
This input simply describes a crossunder of the momentum indicator (indicator 1) and its average.
In the category How does it work? Two main factors are discussed, the first being directional momentum to determine when a downwards move might happen. The crossunder correlated to this input is the directional momentum as mentioned earlier.
As also mentioned in How does it work? The second factor is a confirmation of the desired downwards move. This confirmation is a crossunder of the current price and indicator 2 which will be further addressed later on.
What's important to understand about the two key factors at play in regard to Bars Since Crossunder is that this input is determining a condition which looks for a certain number of bars prior to the confirmation of indicator 2 which the crossunder of momentum and its average has happened on indicator 1.
Example: Bars Since Crossunder input is set to 10. This means that the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 must be within 10 bars prior to the confirmation from indicator 2. If this happens then this condition is met for a short position.
Summary of Input Group: Bars Since Crossover/Crossunder
These two inputs can have a large effect on the types of trades being taken and the risk which your strategy opens up to. The idea is that in order for the two key factors described in How does it work? to be correlated and therefore indicate a strong directional move, the two events must happen within a somewhat small period of time. If the period of time between the two events taking place is too large, then it's riskier for your strategy due to a delay in directional momentum and the necessary confirmation. It's important to note that this “small period of time” is relative to the security you're trading and the timeframe its being trades on. Small could mean 5 bars in some cases or 20 bars in others, this is why our custom back tester exists. So that the process of optimization on different securities and different timeframes is smooth and only requires adjustments to inputs then your own analysis of the back test results.
Indicator 1 Input Long
Defines how strong the upwards momentum needs to be in order to take a long position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a long position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close above following the crossover of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Long set to 50, this means that when the momentum crosses over its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossover the momentum must be above the level 50 in order for this condition to be met to take a long position.
The higher the level, the stronger the upwards momentum must be, and therefore by using higher levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Indicator 1 Input Short
Defines how strong the downwards momentum needs to be in order to take a short position.
When optimizing your strategy, this input is likely to have some of the most effect on when the script takes a short position.
The reasoning for this is because the level you set for this input is the level which indicator 1 must close below following the crossunder of its average.
Example: Indicator 1 Input Short set to 40, this means that when the momentum crosses under its average from indicator 1, upon the close of this crossunder the momentum must be below the level 40 in order for this condition to be met to take a short position.
The lower the level, the stronger the downwards momentum must be, and therefore by using lower levels for this input, the script will search for stronger directional moves leaving less chance for the trade to move against you.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 1 Input Long/Short
These two inputs are so important to your strategy because at the end of the day no matter how you set it up, it's still a momentum-based strategy. With that being said the level of momentum or the strength needed in order to take trades is of course going to be a key decider in the successfulness of the strategy. When optimizing these two inputs make sure to take into account what the overall market conditions are, meaning if it’s a bull market maybe make the momentum needed to take a long slightly less comparatively to the amount needed to take a short, in other words make long conditions less specific and short conditions more specific. Slight variations of this input can have very big effects, even changing it by 1 or 2 can make a major difference. In might even be good to consider starting optimization with these inputs and then work the rest of the strategy out from there. A lot could be said about these inputs and more docs will be added in order to further explain more strategy approaches revolving around them, for now don’t hesitate to ask any questions.
Indicator 2 Red
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses over it following the crossover of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a long position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Red states a condition in order for the script to take a long position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossover of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been red.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossover must also be red. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red this would indicate that a top was just reached, and price is reversing downwards making this not a good area to take a long.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed green 10 bars ago and is currently red is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a long
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was red and it's currently red this would indicate a more prolonged pullback.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been pulling back, now we can enter a long with more knowledge pointing to price reversing upwards from a downwards trend, or continuing its upwards trend after a pullback.
Indicator 2 Green
This input is used as a sort of chop filter at its base level, however if used correctly it can be a much broader filter for what areas of the market you want to trade in.
Indicator 2 shows as either red or green and is used as a confirmation when price crosses under it following the crossunder of momentum and its average from indicator 1 to take a short position.
If ticked on, Indicator 2 Green states a condition in order for the script to take a short position. (Default is on)
The condition is that upon the crossunder of the current price and Indicator 2, 10 bars ago indicator 2 must have been green.
The reason for this input is because the current color of indicator 2 upon the crossunder must also be green. However, this condition is hard coded in and cannot be changed by any input.
This is because the type of trade being targeted is that of a type of reversal or continuation.
If indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green this would indicate that a bottom was just reached, and price is reversing upwards making this not a good area to take a short.
Another scenario if indicator 2 showed red 10 bars ago and is currently green is that there is currently a sideways trend going on or otherwise known as chop, also not an ideal area to take a short.
However, if 10 bars ago indicator 2 was green and it's currently green this would indicate a more prolonged upwards movement.
If all conditions are met and we know that price has been moving up, now we can enter a short with more knowledge pointing to price reversing downwards from an upwards trend, or continuing its downwards trend after a bounce up.
Summary of Input Group: Indicator 2 Red/Green
Similar to Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short, the goal of these inputs is to try to get a picture of what the previous recent market has been doing. By getting this picture it's easier to find different areas of the market more ideal for trades. Different from Indicator 1 Greater/Less Than Long/Short though, Indicator 2 Red/Green is directly correlated to the price action in the market rather than the momentum. By switching these on or off you are setting more or less specific conditions for taking trades. Some markets require this extra condition to lower your risk in your strategy, however others may not.
Pivot Low
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot low when taking a long position.
This pivot low is then used to set the stop loss when entering a long position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot low based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot low.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a long signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot Low 2
Pivot low 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot Low Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot low to be, if the pivot low does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot Low 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot low.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot Low input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot Low input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot Low 2 is used.
Pivot Low 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot Low’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot High
This input is used to define the number of bars the script will look back to grab a pivot high when taking a short position.
This pivot high is then used to set the stop loss when entering a short position.
This input is very important and optimizing it correctly can be extremely crucial to your strategies success.
The Strategy Developer tool uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio when setting your first take profit point, so when the script looks back to get a pivot high based on the input you set, it will then set your first take profit at an equal ratio to the stop loss found from the pivot high.
The goal in optimizing this input is to give enough lookback to find real pivot points where price has reversed off of, but not to give too much lookback where its grabbing previous pivot points unrelated to the current move of momentum the script is giving a short signal from.
Consider the type of trades you're looking for in your strategy and what timeframe you are trying to trade on.
Longer swing trades which aim to catch bigger moves in the market, possibly on higher time frames, may require a further lookback in order to get your take profits in the correct positioning to catch the desired move, and not exit early before the trade has fully played out.
Shorter scalp trades may aim to catch smaller moves and therefore you don’t want to allow for too much risk by having a large stop loss and large take profits as a result.
Pivot High 2
Pivot high 2 can be thought of as a backup lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
In an input which will be discussed shortly called Pivot High Minimum, you can set a minimum percentage for your pivot high to be, if the pivot high does not meet the minimum then the script will look to Pivot High 2’s input to use as a bar lookback in order to get the correct pivot high.
This input is used because you might find a Pivot High input that works well for the majority of the trades in your back tested strategy, however, there will always be outliers and when this Pivot High input falls short of getting the correct level to put your stop losses at, Pivot High 2 is used.
Pivot High 2’s input should always be higher than Pivot High’s input, that way you can allow the script to look back further in time to find the correct level when the minimum is not met.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot Low Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot low can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot low that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a long position, making sure the pivot low isn’t too far down is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot Low Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a long position, when searching for the pivot low in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot low is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance
This input is very important in managing the risk associated with your strategy.
Pivot High Risk Tolerance is defining a maximum percentage the pivot high can be away from your entry.
Since the pivot high that’s found is assigned to your stop loss and directly affects the placement of your take profits when taking a short position, making sure the pivot high isn’t too far up is crucial.
Depending on the types of trades you're aiming to take, the timeframe you choose to trade on, and the leverage you use in your strategy, you may want to assign a higher risk tolerance or a lower one.
Example: Pivot High Risk Tolerance input set to 3, this means that when all other conditions are met in order to take a short position, when searching for the pivot high in order to set a stop loss, if the script finds the pivot high is greater than 3% away from the entry point, it will not take the trade.
Pivot Low Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot low, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot Low Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot low that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot Low 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot low and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot low and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% below your long entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% above your long entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot Low Minimum.
Pivot High Minimum
Sometimes when searching for the pivot high, the script's defined lookback may not be enough to find the proper pivot point.
This can cause improper placement of stop losses and take profits and may cause trades to be exited early before they can fully play out in your favor.
Pivot High Minimum is an input used to combat this problem, when the script finds a pivot high that does not meet the minimum percentage away from the entry point, it will then turn to Pivot High 2 input in order to gain a further lookback and grab the correct pivot point to set your stop loss and take profits with.
When reading and setting this input, understand that setting it to 1 means there is no minimum, setting it to 0.9 would mean the minimum is a 10% difference between the pivot high and your entry point.
Think of it in terms of decimals and their equivalent percentage, 0.1 is equal to 10%, 0.01 is equal to 1%.
Whatever percentage you want to set for a minimum, convert it to a decimal, then simply subtract it from 1.
Example: Say you desire a 1.5% minimum pivot high and as a result an equivalent stop loss of 1.5% above your short entry and furthermore a take profit 1.5% below your short entry since the script uses a 1:1 ratio. Converting 1.5% to a decimal would give you 0.015, then subtracting it from 1 would give you 0.985, this would be the input assigned to Pivot High Minimum.
Summary of Input Group: Pivot Low/High - Pivot Low/High 2 – Pivot Low/High Risk Tolerance – Pivot Low/High Minimum
The first key takeaway from all these inputs is that your stop losses and take profits will be directly affected through optimizing any of them. The second key takeaway is that these inputs are crucial in managing the risk in your strategy, and while this has been said many times throughout the guide for various inputs, when it comes to stop losses and take profits it is especially true. Having a stop loss which is too high opens up the possibility for much bigger losses, and as a result your take profits will also be too high, minimizing the chance of any of them being hit. Having a stop loss which is too low increases the chance that your trade will get stopped out preemptively, before the trade can mature and move in your favor because remember that trades will not always move immediately in the intended direction, a good amount of patience is often involved in creating consistent successful trades and a successful strategy as such. On the same note, too low of a stop loss could also mean you are missing out on unrealized profit since your take profits are a direct result of the stop loss which is found. When optimizing your pivot low/high risk tolerance, think not about how much you are willing to lose on a single trade, but how much your portfolio can actually afford to lose not just on a single trade but multiple trades, sometimes even in a row. Obviously, the goal in creating a strategy is that you avoid losing trades and especially multiple in a row, however, there are many things that can’t be accounted for. The only way to manage this unaccounted risk is to use proper risk management and not open yourself up to big losses even in the worst most unlikely scenarios. Even if you don’t lose multiple trades in a row, ask yourself, could I afford to lose multiple trades with the risk tolerance I have set if everything were to go to $hit, (hopefully it would not), but in the off chance it did, instead of beating yourself up over what you did wrong, you’ll be patting yourself on the back for what you did right.
TP2-4 Long Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% below your long entry, your first take profit will be 2% above your long entry, hence 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Long Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% above our long entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% below long entry. TP2 Long Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Long Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Long Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Long Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your long, your stop loss will automatically move up to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved up in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere below TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved up to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere below TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your long position, but the trade does not continue upwards and moves down to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just below each corresponding take profit for long trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue upwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight up but rather have a series of small pullbacks throughout the more general upwards trend.
Note that when a long trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot low which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot low.
TP2-4 Short Placement
The first thing to understand about the take profit placement is that our system of stop losses and take profits uses a 1:1 risk to reward ratio for the first stop loss and first take profit.
This means that if your stop loss falls 2% above your short entry, your first take profit will be 2% below your short entry, hence, 1:1.
As for take profits 2-4, they are just extensions of that ratio. This means that if TP2 Short Placement is set to 1.5, the ratio for your second take profit is 1:1.5.
Using the same percentage from the second bullet point being 2%, we can now gather that with a 1:1.5 ratio our second take profit would be at 3% below our short entry.
The same applies for the rest of the take profits, meaning whatever the take profit is set at regardless of which one, apply that number to the second placeholder of the ratio.
Example: First stop loss falls 2% above short entry. TP2 Short Placement input set to 1.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:1.5; corresponding percentage would be a 3% gain. TP3 Short Placement input set to 2; risk to reward ratio is 1:2; corresponding percentage would be a 4% gain. TP4 Short Placement input set to 2.5; risk to reward ratio is 1:2.5; corresponding percentage would be a 5% gain.
The next key thing to understand about the trailing take profits system is the position size being sold at each take profit and therefore how the strategy tracker calculates your strategy's profit.
At the first take profit, 50% of your position is being calculated as sold, locking in good profits off the bat.
At TP2, 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving a remaining 30% open to gain more profit.
At TP3, another 20% of your position is being calculated as sold, leaving 10% to collect any additional possible gains.
At TP4 the remaining 10% of your position is sold and the trade will be fully closed out.
SL2-4 Short Placement
Our system of trailing stop losses is completely similar to that of our trailing take profits.
Just like the trailing take profits, the inputs for stop losses 2-4 are also used as the second placeholders in the risk to reward ratio.
This may be confusing since generally stop losses are associated with a loss on your position, however, the only stop loss which results in a loss on your position is the first one, not stop losses 2-4.
This is because once your first take profit is hit on your short, your stop loss will automatically move down to the price equivalent to the ratio which you set using these inputs that lies in profit.
Example: Since your first take profit will always be at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio with your stop loss, your second take profit could be at a 1:0.8 ratio. So, to clarify, once your first take profit is hit at a 1:1, your original first stop loss will now be moved down in profits to just below your first take profit at a 1:0.8 risk to reward ratio. This only happens AFTER the first take profit is hit.
For stop losses 3 and 4, the same logic is true, once TP2 is hit, your second stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL3 which will fall somewhere above TP2. Once TP3 is hit, your third stop loss will now be moved down to the placement of SL4 which will fall somewhere above TP3. If stop loss 4 does not get hit, then the only thing left to happen is for TP4 to hit and the trade will fully close out.
The one major difference between our system of trailing stop losses and take profits is that no matter what stop loss is hit, the entire remainder of your position will be calculated as sold.
So, if your first take profit hits and sells 50% of your short position, but the trade does not continue downwards and moves up to your second stop loss, the remaining 50% of your position will be calculated as sold.
The same applies to SL3 and SL4, so at SL3 the remaining 30% of your position will be calculated as sold, and at SL4 the remaining 10% will be calculated as sold.
Your trailing stop loss placement is dependent on what types of trades you desire. For shorter scalps on smaller timeframes, it's recommended to place each stop loss just above each corresponding take profit for short trades.
This way you leave just enough room for the trade to continue downwards if there is enough momentum, but you don’t open yourself up to losing your unrealized profit if it does not make this continuation.
If you desire longer swing trades on higher timeframes, it might be a good idea to leave more room in between the take profit and corresponding stop loss.
This way you leave more room for the trade to mature and move in your favor since when trading longer moves, often they will not shoot straight down but rather have a series of small bounces throughout the more general downwards trend.
Note that when a short trade is first entered the only stop loss and take profit in play are your original stop loss found by the pivot high which would result in a loss, and the first take profit at a 1:1 risk to reward ratio from that pivot high.
Summary of Take Profit/Stop Loss Placement:
Correctly placed take profits and stop losses are essential in having a successful strategy and proper risk management. With that being said there are also many ways in which to use this system. Deciding how to set them up is really just a matter of determining the trading style you aim to succeed with. Once this has been determined, the placement of take profits and stop losses should be easier to configure. However, if there is any confusion on either of these topics as the ratios and corresponding TP/SL can get confusing, please do not hesitate to ask further questions in our discord!
Leverage Long
Leverage Long input simply defines the leverage used in your long positions, and is used in calculating the profit in Strategy Tracker
A rundown of risk associated with using leverage will not be given here since it should assume that if you're using leverage, you should already understand the risks.
If you are not using any leverage, then set Leverage Long input to 1.
Long Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your long trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Long Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of long hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Long Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Long Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double long.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Long Position Size should always be double your Long Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Short Position Size
This input defines the position size you are using in your short trades.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Short Hedge Position Size
This input is used to define the position size of short hedge positions.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker.
Important: Your Short Hedge Position Size should always be half of your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
Double Short Position Size
This input is used to define the position size when in a double short.
This input is also used in calculating profit in Strategy Tracker
Important: Your Double Short Position Size should always be double your Short Position Size for accurate profit calculation.
A Message From the Developer PLEASE READ!!!
If you have made it this far in the guide, I applaud you and thank you for sticking with it as I know there is a lot of information here! This is not an exaggeration when I say there are hundreds of millions of possible variations that could be applied throughout all the inputs which is why I much prefer to call this a tool rather than an algorithm. Algorithm is a loaded word in my opinion as it comes with an implication of guarantee in the trades being made. This is not meant to discourage anybody from taking trades based off the tool which is also why I provided the option for automated alerts which through third party software can turn into automated trades; if you have the confidence in your strategy by all means I encourage you to trade it, automated or not. Just please understand that it's highly recommended to also apply your own knowledge and analysis before taking a trade as historical back testing data has its limitations and cannot always account for current market conditions. The real applicability does not fall in what the back tester window is saying you would have made or how accurate your strategy would have been, it's within the sheer number of markets and scenarios this tool can be used in and the information you can get which a human just can’t comprehend all at once; its literally endless. I urge all of you to be creative and think outside the box about what you can do with such a powerful tool at your fingertips. After all this is the reason why so many inputs were provided. Another main goal of this project was to give users a better understanding of risk management. It can be hard to manage your risk when it’s all kept in your head, but when you can modify your strategy to better manage your risk by simply optimizing a few inputs, it’s a lot easier to comprehend and actually apply when trading. The last thing I want to say is have fun working through the possible learning curve in using this tool, it may be a process but enjoy it because the one thing I can guarantee is that you will come out the other side a better trader than before!
Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy [Kioseff Trading]Hello!
Introducing the Self-Optimizing RSI Strategy.
The indicator tests up to 800 RSI strategies simultaneously, looping through arrays, and auto plots the best performing parameter set.
The image above shows the result of 800 RSI strategies concurrently.
The table oriented bottom right shows the performance and risk metrics of the best performing RSI system tested across the bar set. Additionally, the conditions for entry and exit are displayed; for the image - a long entry system predicated on RSI crossunders and exit system predicated on a 1% TP and 2% SL are shown.
The indicator calculates numerous risk and performance metrics.
Calculated metrics include:
RSI Parameters
RSI Cross Entry Level
Total Trades
Win Rate
Avg. Gain for Winning Trades
Max Pain
PnL (Cumulative Performance)
Profit Factor
Avg. Loss for Losing Trades
Ratio Avg. Win / Avg. Loss
Avg. Bars in Trade
Max Drawdown
Current Drawdown
Open Position PnL
"Dynamic" indicates the performance of self-optimizing RSI system was tested.
The image above shows the performance of the greatest-performing RSI system - a fixed set of parameters - when adhering to a 1% TP and 2% fixed SL.
Trailing Stops and Profit-Taking Limit orders can be set/simulated.
The image above shows a dynamic entry level - plotted as a purple, non-transparent line.
The entry level "self-optimizes" to mimic the best performing RSI system at current time.
The image above exemplifies the functionality for all horizontal lines plotted on the chart.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a profitable trade is shown.
The average RSI level achieved subsequent a losing trade is shown.
The entry level for RSI crossunders/crossovers is shown.
The image above show the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator recording entries & exits; gains & losses, for each executed trade.
You can "verify" trades manually.
Blue boxes reflect an entered position.
Green boxes reflect a closed, profitable trade.
Red boxes reflect a close, losing trade.
The percentage gain for a profitable trade is appended to green boxes; the percentage loss for a losing trade is appended to red boxes.
The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator plots off the chart; however, percentage gains/losses are measured against price, not RSI.
Boxes correlate to the interval a trade was entered/exited on.
The indicator hosts various methods to filter the outcome for testing.
For instance, you can:
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
Configure the RSI settings that are tested (i.e. RSI 2 - 9, RSI 14 - 20, RSI 50 - 57)
Test short-based RSI Systems and long-based RSI systems
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
Adjust PT and SL percentages.
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
Use trailing stops or fixed stop losses
The image above shows results for 800 short-based RSI systems - using a trailing stop loss.
Test RSI crossunders and crossovers
The image shows results for 800 long-based RSI systems. Positions are entered subsequent to RSI crossovers.
You can select which RSI strategies are tested - you aren't not limited to testing RSI 2 - RSI 9 (:
Simulate limit orders (Exit intrabar at fixed stop losses or trailing stop losses; exit intrabar at profit targets)
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the profit target being exceeded.
The image above shows performance test results when exiting during the interval subsequent to the stop loss being exceeded.
Require all tested RSIs to trend above or below their respective average (i.e. all RSIs must trend above/below their 50-interval EMA values. SMAs can also be used)
The image above shows an RSI EMA in addition to prerequisite condition. For each RSI strategy tested, the RSI used for the strategy must measure above an EMA of its values prior to entry. You can require RSI to measure below an EMA of its values prior to entry, use an SMA, and change the length of the MA used.
Use external indicators and require a user-defined value be exceeded, measured below, or that price exceed or measure below an indicator. The Self-Optimizing RSI indicator incorporates a few built-in technical indicators - ADX, %k, MFI, CMFI, and RSI. Consequently, you can require these indicators to measure above/below a specified level prior to entry. Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator. I'll show an example shortly.
The image above shows me requiring the ADX indicator to measure above "20" prior to long entry. Any of the built-indicators can be used with similar conditions; you can implement a custom-coded indicator for trade logic.
Additionally, you can supplement an extrinsic indicator (anything custom coded with plot values) to the entry logic for the Self-Optimizing RSI indicator.
The image above shows me retrieving the value for Volume Profile Point of Control - a TradingView coded indicator.
Consequently, I can require price to measure above/below the session's Poc prior to RSI long/short entry.
You can use this feature with any custom coded indicator providing historical plot values - something you or a favored author have coded.
]Adjust PT and SL percentages
The image above shows adjusted TP & SL percentages - optimize and reward/risk ratio you'd like (:
Override plot an RSI system to procure thorough statistics.
The image above shows manually plotted RSI parameters and a corresponding stat sheet.
Require a symbol to measure above/Below or equal to a particular price level to “validate” a Long/Short entry signal. You can retrieve any data hosted by TradingView and require it measure above/below a user-defined level prior to entry. For instance, you can select "$VIX", and require the ticker to measure less than $30 prior to long/short entry. If "$VIX" measures greater than $30 prior to a long/short signal the position will not open. Alternatively, you can require a symbol to measure above a user-defined price prior to entry. If the retrieved ticker doesn't measure above the user-defined level prior to entry a trade will not open.
The image above shows me requiring the ticker "$VIX" to measure below $30 prior to long/short entry. If %VIS measures greater than $30 when a long/short signal triggers a position will not be opened. Further refine your trading system with this feature - exploit correlations.
Adjust the time window that's tested.
The image above shows configurable start and end dates for the optimization period.
You won't be able to test 800 RSI strategies concomitantly on a 20,000 bar data set.
Consequently, for large data sets (intrasession data) you will have to narrow the optimization window to test a larger number of combinations.
You can test 80 (loads on all data sets), 144 (loads on all data sets), 264 (loads on ~15,000 bar data sets), 312 (loads on ~11,500 bar data sets) and 800 (loads on ~4950 bar data sets)combinations simultaneously. You can test 800 RSI strategies simultaneously on intrasession data; however, you'll likely have to narrow the tested time window.
I recently published a bar count script titled "Bar Count for Backtesting", you can access the script here:
The above script is useful for quickly calculating the number of bars in a time window, or the date for a bar that is "x" number of bars back. Therefore, implementing these scripts cooperatively should improve date selection efficiency (not arbitrarily selecting test start & end dates that fail to load).
I included a tool tip describing the near-maximum bars in a data set that the higher numbers of simultaneous RSI strategies can be tested on.
More to come; enjoy!
(P.S. The script uses private libraries and, consequently, is unable to be published open source)
An optimization script is best implemented to discover what won't work, not what will work. The best performing "optimized" parameters are not a guaranteed profitable investment system. While we may see an exceptionally positive performance for a set of parameters, it's impossible to know how much of that performance is the beneficiary of market noise in the absence of additional testing. Most market moves are noise - irreplicable sequences that offer no predictive utility - and most "good" backtests overwhelmingly benefit from these irreplicable sequences. An investor unfamiliar with this concept may be lead to believe they have found a valid correlation between an indicator sequence and subsequent price movement, despite the correlation being illusory.
Consequently, it should be assumed that the best performing parameters strongly benefitted from market noise and will not work in a live market - until further rigorous statistical tests are performed on an investment system built around the best performing parameters. This includes out-of-sample, in-sample, and forward testing in addition to testing negatively correlated, positively correlated and zero-correlation assets; testing additional assets should be treated as prerequisite to live implementation.
Of course, all trading strategies, even one's that methodically exploit a valid correlation/replicable sequence, will benefit from market noise - it's impossible to avoid. However, a "legit" trading strategy has a chance to work on future price data, while an overoptimized strategy will fail miserably on new price data!
An overoptimized strategy is virtually guaranteed to have a better backtest performance than a valid strategy. The overoptimized strategy will fail in a live market while the valid strategy has a chance of working. So, should you notice the best performing RSI parameters, be sure to build a comprehensive trading system around the parameters and perform additional tests. This is the only way to know if the optimized parameters will truly work in a live market!
Unfortunately, they often will not!
This publication does not constitute investment advice.
ORB Fusion🎯 CORE INNOVATION: INSTITUTIONAL ORB FRAMEWORK WITH FAILED BREAKOUT INTELLIGENCE
ORB Fusion represents a complete institutional-grade Opening Range Breakout system combining classic Market Profile concepts (Initial Balance, day type classification) with modern algorithmic breakout detection, failed breakout reversal logic, and comprehensive statistical tracking. Rather than simply drawing lines at opening range extremes, this system implements the full trading methodology used by professional floor traders and market makers—including the critical concept that failed breakouts are often higher-probability setups than successful breakouts .
The Opening Range Hypothesis:
The first 30-60 minutes of trading establishes the day's value area —the price range where the majority of participants agree on fair value. This range is formed during peak information flow (overnight news digestion, gap reactions, early institutional positioning). Breakouts from this range signal directional conviction; failures to hold breakouts signal trapped participants and create exploitable reversals.
Why Opening Range Matters:
1. Information Aggregation : Opening range reflects overnight news, pre-market sentiment, and early institutional orders. It's the market's initial "consensus" on value.
2. Liquidity Concentration : Stop losses cluster just outside opening range. Breakouts trigger these stops, creating momentum. Failed breakouts trap traders, forcing reversals.
3. Statistical Persistence : Markets exhibit range expansion tendency —when price accepts above/below opening range with volume, it often extends 1.0-2.0x the opening range size before mean reversion.
4. Institutional Behavior : Large players (market makers, institutions) use opening range as reference for the day's trading plan. They fade extremes in rotation days and follow breakouts in trend days.
Historical Context:
Opening Range Breakout methodology originated in commodity futures pits (1970s-80s) where floor traders noticed consistent patterns: the first 30-60 minutes established a "fair value zone," and directional moves occurred when this zone was violated with conviction. J. Peter Steidlmayer formalized this observation in Market Profile theory, introducing the "Initial Balance" concept—the first hour (two 30-minute periods) defining market structure.
📊 OPENING RANGE CONSTRUCTION
Four ORB Timeframe Options:
1. 5-Minute ORB (0930-0935 ET):
Captures immediate market direction during "opening drive"—the explosive first few minutes when overnight orders hit the tape.
Use Case:
• Scalping strategies
• High-frequency breakout trading
• Extremely liquid instruments (ES, NQ, SPY)
Characteristics:
• Very tight range (often 0.2-0.5% of price)
• Early breakouts common (7 of 10 days break within first hour)
• Higher false breakout rate (50-60%)
• Requires sub-minute chart monitoring
Psychology: Captures panic buyers/sellers reacting to overnight news. Range is small because sample size is minimal—only 5 minutes of price discovery. Early breakouts often fail because they're driven by retail FOMO rather than institutional conviction.
2. 15-Minute ORB (0930-0945 ET):
Balances responsiveness with statistical validity. Captures opening drive plus initial reaction to that drive.
Use Case:
• Day trading strategies
• Balanced scalping/swing hybrid
• Most liquid instruments
Characteristics:
• Moderate range (0.4-0.8% of price typically)
• Breakout rate ~60% of days
• False breakout rate ~40-45%
• Good balance of opportunity and reliability
Psychology: Includes opening panic AND the first retest/consolidation. Sophisticated traders (institutions, algos) start expressing directional bias. This is the "Goldilocks" timeframe—not too reactive, not too slow.
3. 30-Minute ORB (0930-1000 ET):
Classic ORB timeframe. Default for most professional implementations.
Use Case:
• Standard intraday trading
• Position sizing for full-day trades
• All liquid instruments (equities, indices, futures)
Characteristics:
• Substantial range (0.6-1.2% of price)
• Breakout rate ~55% of days
• False breakout rate ~35-40%
• Statistical sweet spot for extensions
Psychology: Full opening auction + first institutional repositioning complete. By 10:00 AM ET, headlines are digested, early stops are hit, and "real" directional players reveal themselves. This is when institutional programs typically finish their opening positioning.
Statistical Advantage: 30-minute ORB shows highest correlation with daily range. When price breaks and holds outside 30m ORB, probability of reaching 1.0x extension (doubling the opening range) exceeds 60% historically.
4. 60-Minute ORB (0930-1030 ET) - Initial Balance:
Steidlmayer's "Initial Balance"—the foundation of Market Profile theory.
Use Case:
• Swing trading entries
• Day type classification
• Low-frequency institutional setups
Characteristics:
• Wide range (0.8-1.5% of price)
• Breakout rate ~45% of days
• False breakout rate ~25-30% (lowest)
• Best for trend day identification
Psychology: Full first hour captures A-period (0930-1000) and B-period (1000-1030). By 10:30 AM ET, all early positioning is complete. Market has "voted" on value. Subsequent price action confirms (trend day) or rejects (rotation day) this value assessment.
Initial Balance Theory:
IB represents the market's accepted value area . When price extends significantly beyond IB (>1.5x IB range), it signals a Trend Day —strong directional conviction. When price remains within 1.0x IB, it signals a Rotation Day —mean reversion environment. This classification completely changes trading strategy.
🔬 LTF PRECISION TECHNOLOGY
The Chart Timeframe Problem:
Traditional ORB indicators calculate range using the chart's current timeframe. This creates critical inaccuracies:
Example:
• You're on a 5-minute chart
• ORB period is 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET)
• Indicator sees only 6 bars (30min ÷ 5min/bar = 6 bars)
• If any 5-minute bar has extreme wick, entire ORB is distorted
The Problem Amplifies:
• On 15-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 2 bars sampled
• On 30-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 1 bar sampled
• Opening spike or single large wick defines entire range (invalid)
Solution: Lower Timeframe (LTF) Precision:
ORB Fusion uses `request.security_lower_tf()` to sample 1-minute bars regardless of chart timeframe:
```
For 30-minute ORB on 15-minute chart:
- Traditional method: Uses 2 bars (15min × 2 = 30min)
- LTF Precision: Requests thirty 1-minute bars, calculates true high/low
```
Why This Matters:
Scenario: ES futures, 15-minute chart, 30-minute ORB
• Traditional ORB: High = 5850.00, Low = 5842.00 (range = 8 points)
• LTF Precision ORB: High = 5848.50, Low = 5843.25 (range = 5.25 points)
Difference: 2.75 points distortion from single 15-minute wick hitting 5850.00 at 9:31 AM then immediately reversing. LTF precision filters this out by seeing it was a fleeting wick, not a sustained high.
Impact on Extensions:
With inflated range (8 points vs 5.25 points):
• 1.5x extension projects +12 points instead of +7.875 points
• Difference: 4.125 points (nearly $200 per ES contract)
• Breakout signals trigger late; extension targets unreachable
Implementation:
```pinescript
getLtfHighLow() =>
float ha = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", high)
float la = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", low)
```
Function returns arrays of 1-minute high/low values, then finds true maximum and minimum across all samples.
When LTF Precision Activates:
Only when chart timeframe exceeds ORB session window:
• 5-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF used (chart TF > session bars needed)
• 1-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF not needed (direct sampling sufficient)
Recommendation: Always enable LTF Precision unless you're on 1-minute charts. The computational overhead is negligible, and accuracy improvement is substantial.
⚖️ INITIAL BALANCE (IB) FRAMEWORK
Steidlmayer's Market Profile Innovation:
J. Peter Steidlmayer developed Market Profile in the 1980s for the Chicago Board of Trade. His key insight: market structure is best understood through time-at-price (value area) rather than just price-over-time (traditional charts).
Initial Balance Definition:
IB is the price range established during the first hour of trading, subdivided into:
• A-Period : First 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET for US equities)
• B-Period : Second 30 minutes (1000-1030 ET)
A-Period vs B-Period Comparison:
The relationship between A and B periods forecasts the day:
B-Period Expansion (Bullish):
• B-period high > A-period high
• B-period low ≥ A-period low
• Interpretation: Buyers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bullish continuation likely
• Strategy: Buy pullbacks to A-period high (now support)
B-Period Expansion (Bearish):
• B-period low < A-period low
• B-period high ≤ A-period high
• Interpretation: Sellers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bearish continuation likely
• Strategy: Sell rallies to A-period low (now resistance)
B-Period Contraction:
• B-period stays within A-period range
• Interpretation: Market indecisive, digesting A-period information
• Implication: Rotation day likely, stay range-bound
• Strategy: Fade extremes, sell high/buy low within IB
IB Extensions:
Professional traders use IB as a ruler to project price targets:
Extension Levels:
• 0.5x IB : Initial probe outside value (minor target)
• 1.0x IB : Full extension (major target for normal days)
• 1.5x IB : Trend day threshold (classifies as trending)
• 2.0x IB : Strong trend day (rare, ~10-15% of days)
Calculation:
```
IB Range = IB High - IB Low
Bull Extension 1.0x = IB High + (IB Range × 1.0)
Bear Extension 1.0x = IB Low - (IB Range × 1.0)
```
Example:
ES futures:
• IB High: 5850.00
• IB Low: 5842.00
• IB Range: 8.00 points
Extensions:
• 1.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 8 = 5858.00
• 1.5x Bull Target: 5850 + 12 = 5862.00
• 2.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 16 = 5866.00
If price reaches 5862.00 (1.5x), day is classified as Trend Day —strategy shifts from mean reversion to trend following.
📈 DAY TYPE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Four Day Types (Market Profile Framework):
1. TREND DAY:
Definition: Price extends ≥1.5x IB range in one direction and stays there.
Characteristics:
• Opens and never returns to IB
• Persistent directional movement
• Volume increases as day progresses (conviction building)
• News-driven or strong institutional flow
Frequency: ~20-25% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Follow the trend, trail stops, let winners run
• DON'T: Fade extremes, take early profits
• Key: Add to position on pullbacks to previous extension level
• Risk: Getting chopped in false trend (see Failed Breakout section)
Example: FOMC decision, payroll report, earnings surprise—anything creating one-sided conviction.
2. NORMAL DAY:
Definition: Price extends 0.5-1.5x IB, tests both sides, returns to IB.
Characteristics:
• Two-sided trading
• Extensions occur but don't persist
• Volume balanced throughout day
• Most common day type
Frequency: ~45-50% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Take profits at extension levels, expect reversals
• DON'T: Hold for massive moves
• Key: Treat each extension as a profit-taking opportunity
• Risk: Holding too long when momentum shifts
Example: Typical day with no major catalysts—market balancing supply and demand.
3. ROTATION DAY:
Definition: Price stays within IB all day, rotating between high and low.
Characteristics:
• Never accepts outside IB
• Multiple tests of IB high/low
• Decreasing volume (no conviction)
• Classic range-bound action
Frequency: ~25-30% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Fade extremes (sell IB high, buy IB low)
• DON'T: Chase breakouts
• Key: Enter at extremes with tight stops just outside IB
• Risk: Breakout finally occurs after multiple failures
Example: [/b> Pre-holiday trading, summer doldrums, consolidation after big move.
4. DEVELOPING:
Definition: Day type not yet determined (early in session).
Usage: Classification before 12:00 PM ET when IB extension pattern unclear.
ORB Fusion's Classification Algorithm:
```pinescript
if close > ibHigh:
ibExtension = (close - ibHigh) / ibRange
direction = "BULLISH"
else if close < ibLow:
ibExtension = (ibLow - close) / ibRange
direction = "BEARISH"
if ibExtension >= 1.5:
dayType = "TREND DAY"
else if ibExtension >= 0.5:
dayType = "NORMAL DAY"
else if close within IB:
dayType = "ROTATION DAY"
```
Why Classification Matters:
Same setup (bullish ORB breakout) has opposite implications:
• Trend Day : Hold for 2.0x extension, trail stops aggressively
• Normal Day : Take profits at 1.0x extension, watch for reversal
• Rotation Day : Fade the breakout immediately (likely false)
Knowing day type prevents catastrophic errors like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
🚀 BREAKOUT DETECTION & CONFIRMATION
Three Confirmation Methods:
1. Close Beyond Level (Recommended):
Logic: Candle must close above ORB high (bull) or below ORB low (bear).
Why:
• Filters out wicks (temporary liquidity grabs)
• Ensures sustained acceptance above/below range
• Reduces false breakout rate by ~20-30%
Example:
• ORB High: 5850.00
• Bar high touches 5850.50 (wick above)
• Bar closes at 5848.00 (inside range)
• Result: NO breakout signal
vs.
• Bar high touches 5850.50
• Bar closes at 5851.00 (outside range)
• Result: BREAKOUT signal confirmed
Trade-off: Slightly delayed entry (wait for close) but much higher reliability.
2. Wick Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Any touch of ORB high/low triggers breakout.
Why:
• Earliest possible entry
• Captures aggressive momentum moves
Risk:
• High false breakout rate (60-70%)
• Stop runs trigger signals
• Requires very tight stops (difficult to manage)
Use Case: Scalping with 1-2 point profit targets where any penetration = trade.
3. Body Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Candle body (close vs open) must be entirely outside range.
Why:
• Strictest confirmation
• Ensures directional conviction (not just momentum)
• Lowest false breakout rate
Example: Trade-off: [/b> Very conservative—misses some valid breakouts but rarely triggers on false ones.
Volume Confirmation Layer:
All confirmation methods can require volume validation:
Volume Multiplier Logic: Rationale: [/b> True breakouts are driven by institutional activity (large size). Volume spike confirms real conviction vs. stop-run manipulation.
Statistical Impact: [/b>
• Breakouts with volume confirmation: ~65% success rate
• Breakouts without volume: ~45% success rate
• Difference: 20 percentage points edge
Implementation Note: [/b>
Volume confirmation adds complexity—you'll miss breakouts that work but lack volume. However, when targeting 1.5x+ extensions (ambitious goals), volume confirmation becomes critical because those moves require sustained institutional participation.
Recommended Settings by Strategy: [/b>
Scalping (1-2 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: OFF
• Rationale: Quick in/out doesn't need perfection
Intraday Swing (5-10 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: ON (1.5x multiplier)
• Rationale: Balance reliability and opportunity
Position Trading (full-day holds): [/b>
• Method: Body
• Volume: ON (2.0x multiplier)
• Rationale: Must be certain—large stops require high win rate
🔥 FAILED BREAKOUT SYSTEM
The Core Insight: [/b>
Failed breakouts are often more profitable [/b> than successful breakouts because they create trapped traders with predictable behavior.
Failed Breakout Definition: [/b>
A breakout that:
1. Initially penetrates ORB level with confirmation
2. Attracts participants (volume spike, momentum)
3. Fails to extend (stalls or immediately reverses)
4. Returns inside ORB range within N bars
Psychology of Failure: [/b>
When breakout fails:
• Breakout buyers are trapped [/b>: Bought at ORB high, now underwater
• Early longs reduce: Take profit, fearful of reversal
• Shorts smell blood: See failed breakout as reversal signal
• Result: Cascade of selling as trapped bulls exit + new shorts enter
Mirror image for failed bearish breakouts (trapped shorts cover + new longs enter).
Failure Detection Parameters: [/b>
1. Failure Confirmation Bars (default: 3): [/b>
How many bars after breakout to confirm failure?
Logic: Settings: [/b>
• 2 bars: Aggressive failure detection (more signals, more false failures)
• 3 bars Balanced (default)
• 5-10 bars: Conservative (wait for clear reversal)
Why This Matters:
Too few bars: You call "failed breakout" when price is just consolidating before next leg.
Too many bars: You miss the reversal entry (price already back in range).
2. Failure Buffer (default: 0.1 ATR): [/b>
How far inside ORB must price return to confirm failure?
Formula: Why Buffer Matters: clear rejection [/b> (not just hovering at level).
Settings: [/b>
• 0.0 ATR: No buffer, immediate failure signal
• 0.1 ATR: Small buffer (default) - filters noise
• [b>0.2-0.3 ATR: Large buffer - only dramatic failures count
Example: Reversal Entry System: [/b>
When failure confirmed, system generates complete reversal trade:
For Failed Bull Breakout (Short Reversal): [/b>
Entry: [/b> Current close when failure confirmed
Stop Loss: [/b> Extreme high since breakout + 0.10 ATR padding
Target 1: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 0.5)
Target 2: Target 3: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 1.5)
Example:
• ORB High: 5850, ORB Low: 5842, Range: 8 points
• Breakout to 5853, fails, reverses to 5848 (entry)
• Stop: 5853 + 1 = 5854 (6 point risk)
• T1: 5850 - 4 = 5846 (-2 points, 1:3 R:R)
• T2: 5850 - 8 = 5842 (-6 points, 1:1 R:R)
• T3: 5850 - 12 = 5838 (-10 points, 1.67:1 R:R)
[b>Why These Targets? [/b>
• T1 (0.5x ORB below high): Trapped bulls start panic
• T2 (1.0x ORB = ORB Mid): Major retracement, momentum fully reversed
• T3 (1.5x ORB): Reversal extended, now targeting opposite side
Historical Performance: [/b>
Failed breakout reversals in ORB Fusion's tracking system show:
• Win Rate: 65-75% (significantly higher than initial breakouts)
• Average Winner: 1.2x ORB range
• Average Loser: 0.5x ORB range (protected by stop at extreme)
• Expectancy: Strongly positive even with <70% win rate
Why Failed Breakouts Outperform: [/b>
1. Information Advantage: You now know what price did (failed to extend). Initial breakout trades are speculative; reversal trades are reactive to confirmed failure.
2. Trapped Participant Pressure: Every trapped bull becomes a seller. This creates sustained pressure.
3. Stop Loss Clarity: Extreme high is obvious stop (just beyond recent high). Breakout trades have ambiguous stops (ORB mid? Recent low? Too wide or too tight).
4. Mean Reversion Edge: Failed breakouts return to value (ORB mid). Initial breakouts try to escape value (harder to sustain).
Critical Insight: [/b>
"The best trade is often the one that trapped everyone else."
Failed breakouts create asymmetric opportunity because you're trading against [/b> trapped participants rather than with [/b> them. When you see a failed breakout signal, you're seeing real-time evidence that the market rejected directional conviction—that's exploitable.
📐 FIBONACCI EXTENSION SYSTEM
Six Extension Levels: [/b>
Extensions project how far price will travel after ORB breakout. Based on Fibonacci ratios + empirical market behavior.
1. 1.272x (27.2% Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.272)
Psychology: [/b> Initial probe beyond ORB. Early momentum + trapped shorts (on bull side) covering.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~75-80% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• First resistance/support after breakout
• Partial profit target (take 30-50% off)
• Watch for rejection here (could signal failure in progress)
Why 1.272? [/b> Related to harmonic patterns (1.272 is √1.618). Empirically, markets often stall at 25-30% extension before deciding whether to continue or fail.
2. 1.5x (50% Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.5)
Psychology: [/b> Breakout gaining conviction. Requires sustained buying/selling (not just momentum spike).
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~60-65% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Major partial profit (take 50-70% off)
• Move stops to breakeven
• Trail remaining position
Why 1.5x? [/b> Classic halfway point to 2.0x. Markets often consolidate here before final push. If day type is "Normal," this is likely the high/low for the day.
3. 1.618x (Golden Ratio Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.618)
Psychology: [/b> Strong directional day. Institutional conviction + retail FOMO.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~45-50% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Final partial profit (close 80-90%)
• Trail remainder with wide stop (allow breathing room)
Why 1.618? [/b> Fibonacci golden ratio. Appears consistently in market geometry. When price reaches 1.618x extension, move is "mature" and reversal risk increases.
4. 2.0x (100% Extension): [/b>
Formula: ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.0)
Psychology: [/b> Trend day confirmed. Opening range completely duplicated.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~30-35% after confirmed breakout
Trading: Why 2.0x? [/b> Psychological level—range doubled. Also corresponds to typical daily ATR in many instruments (opening range ~ 0.5 ATR, daily range ~ 1.0 ATR).
5. 2.618x (Super Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.618)
Psychology: [/b> Parabolic move. News-driven or squeeze.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~10-15% after confirmed breakout
[b>Trading: Why 2.618? [/b> Fibonacci ratio (1.618²). Rare to reach—when it does, move is extreme. Often precedes multi-day consolidation or reversal.
6. 3.0x (Extreme Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 2.0)
Psychology: [/b> Market melt-up/crash. Only in extreme events.
[b>Probability of Reach: [/b> <5% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Close immediately if reached
• These are outlier events (black swans, flash crashes, squeeze-outs)
• Holding for more is greed—take windfall profit
Why 3.0x? [/b> Triple opening range. So rare it's statistical noise. When it happens, it's headline news.
Visual Example:
ES futures, ORB 5842-5850 (8 point range), Bullish breakout:
• ORB High : 5850.00 (entry zone)
• 1.272x : 5850 + 2.18 = 5852.18 (first resistance)
• 1.5x : 5850 + 4.00 = 5854.00 (major target)
• 1.618x : 5850 + 4.94 = 5854.94 (strong target)
• 2.0x : 5850 + 8.00 = 5858.00 (trend day)
• 2.618x : 5850 + 12.94 = 5862.94 (extreme)
• 3.0x : 5850 + 16.00 = 5866.00 (parabolic)
Profit-Taking Strategy:
Optimal scaling out at extensions:
• Breakout entry at 5850.50
• 30% off at 1.272x (5852.18) → +1.68 points
• 40% off at 1.5x (5854.00) → +3.50 points
• 20% off at 1.618x (5854.94) → +4.44 points
• 10% off at 2.0x (5858.00) → +7.50 points
[b>Average Exit: Conclusion: [/b> Scaling out at extensions produces 40% higher expectancy than holding for home runs.
📊 GAP ANALYSIS & FILL PSYCHOLOGY
[b>Gap Definition: [/b>
Price discontinuity between previous close and current open:
• Gap Up : Open > Previous Close + noise threshold (0.1 ATR)
• Gap Down : Open < Previous Close - noise threshold
Why Gaps Matter: [/b>
Gaps represent unfilled orders [/b>. When market gaps up, all limit buy orders between yesterday's close and today's open are never filled. Those buyers are "left behind." Psychology: they wait for price to return ("fill the gap") so they can enter. This creates magnetic pull [/b> toward gap level.
Gap Fill Statistics (Empirical): [/b>
• Gaps <0.5% [/b>: 85-90% fill within same day
• Gaps 0.5-1.0% [/b>: 70-75% fill within same day, 90%+ within week
• Gaps >1.0% [/b>: 50-60% fill within same day (major news often prevents fill)
Gap Fill Strategy: [/b>
Setup 1: Gap-and-Go
Gap opens, extends away from gap (doesn't fill).
• ORB confirms direction away from gap
• Trade WITH ORB breakout direction
• Expectation: Gap won't fill today (momentum too strong)
Setup 2: Gap-Fill Fade
Gap opens, but fails to extend. Price drifts back toward gap.
• ORB breakout TOWARD gap (not away)
• Trade toward gap fill level
• Target: Previous close (gap fill complete)
Setup 3: Gap-Fill Rejection
Gap fills (touches previous close) then rejects.
• ORB breakout AWAY from gap after fill
• Trade away from gap direction
• Thesis: Gap filled (orders executed), now resume original direction
[b>Example: Scenario A (Gap-and-Go):
• ORB breaks upward to $454 (away from gap)
• Trade: LONG breakout, expect continued rally
• Gap becomes support ($452)
Scenario B (Gap-Fill):
• ORB breaks downward through $452.50 (toward gap)
• Trade: SHORT toward gap fill at $450.00
• Target: $450.00 (gap filled), close position
Scenario C (Gap-Fill Rejection):
• Price drifts to $450.00 (gap filled) early in session
• ORB establishes $450-$451 after gap fill
• ORB breaks upward to $451.50
• Trade: LONG breakout (gap is filled, now resume rally)
ORB Fusion Integration: [/b>
Dashboard shows:
• Gap type (Up/Down/None)
• Gap size (percentage)
• Gap fill status (Filled ✓ / Open)
This informs setup confidence:
• ORB breakout AWAY from unfilled gap: +10% confidence (gap becomes support/resistance)
• ORB breakout TOWARD unfilled gap: -10% confidence (gap fill may override ORB)
[b>📈 VWAP & INSTITUTIONAL BIAS [/b>
[b>Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP): [/b>
Average price weighted by volume at each price level. Represents true "average" cost for the day.
[b>Calculation: Institutional Benchmark [/b>: Institutions (mutual funds, pension funds) use VWAP as performance benchmark. If they buy above VWAP, they underperformed; below VWAP, they outperformed.
2. [b>Algorithmic Target [/b>: Many algos are programmed to buy below VWAP and sell above VWAP to achieve "fair" execution.
3. [b>Support/Resistance [/b>: VWAP acts as dynamic support (price above) or resistance (price below).
[b>VWAP Bands (Standard Deviations): [/b>
• [b>1σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 1 standard deviation
- Contains ~68% of volume
- Normal trading range
- Bounces common
• [b>2σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 2 standard deviations
- Contains ~95% of volume
- Extreme extension
- Mean reversion likely
ORB + VWAP Confluence: [/b>
Highest-probability setups occur when ORB and VWAP align:
Bullish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout upward (bullish signal)
• Price above VWAP (institutional buying)
• Confidence boost: +15%
Bearish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout downward (bearish signal)
• Price below VWAP (institutional selling)
• Confidence boost: +15%
[b>Divergence Warning:
• ORB breakout upward BUT price below VWAP
• Conflict: Breakout says "buy," VWAP says "sell"
• Confidence penalty: -10%
• Interpretation: Retail buying but institutions not participating (lower quality breakout)
📊 MOMENTUM CONTEXT SYSTEM
[b>Innovation: Candle Coloring by Position
Rather than fixed support/resistance lines, ORB Fusion colors candles based on their [b>relationship to ORB :
[b>Three Zones: [/b>
1. Inside ORB (Blue Boxes): [/b>
[b>Calculation:
• Darker blue: Near extremes of ORB (potential breakout imminent)
• Lighter blue: Near ORB mid (consolidation)
[b>Trading: [/b> Coiled spring—await breakout.
[b>2. Above ORB (Green Boxes):
[b>Calculation: 3. Below ORB (Red Boxes):
Mirror of above ORB logic.
[b>Special Contexts: [/b>
[b>Breakout Bar (Darkest Green/Red): [/b>
The specific bar where breakout occurs gets maximum color intensity regardless of distance. This highlights the pivotal moment.
[b>Failed Breakout Bar (Orange/Warning): [/b>
When failed breakout is confirmed, that bar gets orange/warning color. Visual alert: "reversal opportunity here."
[b>Near Extension (Cyan/Magenta Tint): [/b>
When price is within 0.5 ATR of an extension level, candle gets tinted cyan (bull) or magenta (bear). Indicates "target approaching—prepare to take profit."
[b>Why Visual Context? [/b>
Traditional indicators show lines. ORB Fusion shows [b>context-aware momentum [/b>. Glance at chart:
• Lots of blue? Consolidation day (fade extremes).
• Progressive green? Trend day (follow).
• Green then orange? Failed breakout (reversal setup).
This visual language communicates market state instantly—no interpretation needed.
🎯 TRADE SETUP GENERATION & GRADING [/b>
[b>Algorithmic Setup Detection: [/b>
ORB Fusion continuously evaluates market state and generates current best trade setup with:
• Action (LONG / SHORT / FADE HIGH / FADE LOW / WAIT)
• Entry price
• Stop loss
• Three targets
• Risk:Reward ratio
• Confidence score (0-100)
• Grade (A+ to D)
[b>Setup Types: [/b>
[b>1. ORB LONG (Bullish Breakout): [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bullish ORB breakout confirmed
• Not failed
[b>Parameters:
• Entry: Current close
• Stop: ORB mid (protects against failure)
• T1: ORB High + 0.5x range (1.5x extension)
• T2: ORB High + 1.0x range (2.0x extension)
• T3: ORB High + 1.618x range (2.618x extension)
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bearish breakout occurred
• Failed (returned inside ORB)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: Close when failure confirmed
• Stop: Extreme low since breakout + 0.10 ATR
• T1: ORB Low + 0.5x range
• T2: ORB Low + 1.0x range (ORB mid)
• T3: ORB Low + 1.5x range
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger:
• Inside ORB
• Close > ORB mid (near high)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: ORB High (limit order)
• Stop: ORB High + 0.2x range
• T1: ORB Mid
• T2: ORB Low
[b>Confidence Scoring: [/b>
Base: 40 points (lower base—range fading is lower probability than breakout/reversal)
[b>Use Case: [/b> Rotation days. Not recommended on normal/trend days.
[b>6. FADE LOW (Range Trade):
Mirror of FADE HIGH.
[b>7. WAIT:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• ORB not complete yet OR
• No clear setup (price in no-man's-land)
[b>Action: [/b> Observe, don't trade.
[b>Confidence: [/b> 0 points
[b>Grading System:
```
Confidence → Grade
85-100 → A+
75-84 → A
65-74 → B+
55-64 → B
45-54 → C
0-44 → D
```
[b>Grade Interpretation: [/b>
• [b>A+ / A: High probability setup. Take these trades.
• [b>B+ / B [/b>: Decent setup. Trade if fits system rules.
• [b>C [/b>: Marginal setup. Only if very experienced.
• [b>D [/b>: Poor setup or no setup. Don't trade.
[b>Example Scenario: [/b>
ES futures:
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 point range)
• Bullish breakout to 5851 confirmed
• Volume: 2.0x average (confirmed)
• VWAP: 5845 (price above VWAP ✓)
• Day type: Developing (too early, no bonus)
• Gap: None
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Action: LONG
• Entry: 5851
• Stop: 5846 (ORB mid, -5 point risk)
• T1: 5854 (+3 points, 1:0.6 R:R)
• T2: 5858 (+7 points, 1:1.4 R:R)
• T3: 5862.94 (+11.94 points, 1:2.4 R:R)
[b>Confidence: LONG with 55% confidence.
Interpretation: Solid setup, not perfect. Trade it if your system allows B-grade signals.
[b>📊 STATISTICS TRACKING & PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS [/b>
[b>Real-Time Performance Metrics: [/b>
ORB Fusion tracks comprehensive statistics over user-defined lookback (default 50 days):
[b>Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Bull Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
• [b>Bear Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
[b>Win Definition: [/b> Breakout reaches ≥1.0x extension (doubles the opening range) before end of day.
[b>Example: [/b>
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 points)
• Bull breakout at 5851
• Reaches 5858 (1.0x extension) by close
• Result: WIN
[b>Failed Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Total Failed Breakouts [/b>: Count of breakouts that failed
• [b>Reversal Wins [/b>: Count where reversal trade reached target
• [b>Failed Reversal Win Rate [/b>: Wins / Total Failed
[b>Win Definition for Reversals: [/b>
• Failed bull → reversal short reaches ORB mid
• Failed bear → reversal long reaches ORB mid
[b>Extension Tracking: [/b>
• [b>Average Extension Reached [/b>: Mean of maximum extension achieved across all breakout days
• [b>Max Extension Overall [/b>: Largest extension ever achieved in lookback period
[b>Example: 🎨 THREE DISPLAY MODES
[b>Design Philosophy: [/b>
Not all traders need all features. Beginners want simplicity. Professionals want everything. ORB Fusion adapts.
[b>SIMPLE MODE: [/b>
[b>Shows: [/b>
• Primary ORB levels (High, Mid, Low)
• ORB box
• Breakout signals (triangles)
• Failed breakout signals (crosses)
• Basic dashboard (ORB status, breakout status, setup)
• VWAP
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels and extensions
• ORB extensions beyond basic levels
• Gap analysis visuals
• Statistics dashboard
• Momentum candle coloring
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Traders who want clean chart
• Focus on core ORB concept only
• Mobile trading (less screen space)
[b>STANDARD MODE:
[b>Shows Everything in Simple Plus: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels (high, low, mid)
• IB extensions
• ORB extensions (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x)
• Gap analysis and fill targets
• VWAP bands (1σ and 2σ)
• Momentum candle coloring
• Context section in dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Advanced extensions (2.618x, 3.0x)
• Detailed statistics dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Most traders
• Balance between information and clarity
• Covers 90% of use cases
[b>ADVANCED MODE:
[b>Shows Everything:
• All session ORBs
• All IB levels and extensions
• All ORB extensions (including 2.618x and 3.0x)
• Full gap analysis
• VWAP with both 1σ and 2σ bands
• Momentum candle coloring
• Complete statistics dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
• All context metrics
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Professional traders
• System developers
• Those who want maximum information density
[b>Switching Modes: [/b>
Single dropdown input: "Display Mode" → Simple / Standard / Advanced
Entire indicator adapts instantly. No need to toggle 20 individual settings.
📖 NARRATIVE DASHBOARD
[b>Innovation: Plain-English Market State [/b>
Most indicators show data. ORB Fusion explains what the data [b>means [/b>.
[b>Narrative Components: [/b>
[b>1. Phase: [/b>
• "📍 Building ORB..." (during ORB session)
• "📊 Trading Phase" (after ORB complete)
• "⏳ Pre-Market" (before ORB session)
[b>2. Status (Current Observation): [/b>
• "⚠️ Failed breakout - reversal likely"
• "🚀 Bullish momentum in play"
• "📉 Bearish momentum in play"
• "⚖️ Consolidating in range"
• "👀 Monitoring for setup"
[b>3. Next Level:
Tells you what to watch for:
• "🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00" (next extension target)
• "Watch ORB levels" (inside range, await breakout)
[b>4. Setup: [/b>
Current trade setup + grade:
• "LONG " (bullish breakout, A-grade)
• "🔥 SHORT REVERSAL " (failed bull breakout, A+-grade)
• "WAIT " (no setup)
[b>5. Reason: [/b>
Why this setup exists:
• "ORB Bullish Breakout"
• "Failed Bear Breakout - High Probability Reversal"
• "Range Fade - Near High"
[b>6. Tip (Market Insight):
Contextual advice:
• "🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops" (day type is trending)
• "🔄 ROTATION - Fade extremes" (day type is rotating)
• "📊 Gap unfilled - magnet level" (gap creates target)
• "📈 Normal conditions" (no special context)
[b>Example Narrative:
```
📖 ORB Narrative
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
Phase | 📊 Trading Phase
Status | 🚀 Bullish momentum in play
Next | 🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00
📈 Setup | LONG
Reason | ORB Bullish Breakout
💡 Tip | 🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops
```
[b>Glance Interpretation: [/b>
"We're in trading phase. Bullish breakout happened (momentum in play). Next target is 1.5x extension at 5854. Current setup is LONG with A-grade. It's a trend day, so trail stops (don't take early profits)."
Complete market state communicated in 6 lines. No interpretation needed.
[b>Why This Matters:
Beginner traders struggle with "So what?" question. Indicators show lines and signals, but what does it mean [/b>? Narrative dashboard bridges this gap.
Professional traders benefit too—rapid context assessment during fast-moving markets. No time to analyze; glance at narrative, get action plan.
🔔 INTELLIGENT ALERT SYSTEM
[b>Four Alert Types: [/b>
[b>1. Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> ORB breakout confirmed (bull or bear)
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🚀 ORB BULLISH BREAKOUT
Price: 5851.00
Volume Confirmed
Grade: A
```
[b>Frequency: [/b> Once per bar (prevents spam)
[b>2. Failed Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Breakout fails, reversal setup generated
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🔥 FAILED BULLISH BREAKOUT!
HIGH PROBABILITY SHORT REVERSAL
Entry: 5848.00
Stop: 5854.00
T1: 5846.00
T2: 5842.00
Historical Win Rate: 73%
```
[b>Why Comprehensive? [/b> Failed breakout alerts include complete trade plan. You can execute immediately from alert—no need to check chart.
[b>3. Extension Alert:
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price reaches extension level for first time
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🎯 Bull Extension 1.5x reached @ 5854.00
```
[b>Use: [/b> Profit-taking reminder. When extension hit, consider scaling out.
[b>4. IB Break Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price breaks above IB high or below IB low
[b>Message: [/b>
```
📊 IB HIGH BROKEN - Potential Trend Day
```
[b>Use: [/b> Day type classification. IB break suggests trend day developing—adjust strategy to trend-following mode.
[b>Alert Management: [/b>
Each alert type can be enabled/disabled independently. Prevents notification overload.
[b>Cooldown Logic: [/b>
Alerts won't fire if same alert type triggered within last bar. Prevents:
• "Breakout" alert every tick during choppy breakout
• Multiple "extension" alerts if price oscillates at level
Ensures: One clean alert per event.
⚙️ KEY PARAMETERS EXPLAINED
[b>Opening Range Settings: [/b>
• [b>ORB Timeframe [/b> (5/15/30/60 min): Duration of opening range window
- 30 min recommended for most traders
• [b>Use RTH Only [/b> (ON/OFF): Only trade during regular trading hours
- ON recommended (avoids thin overnight markets)
• [b>Use LTF Precision [/b> (ON/OFF): Sample 1-minute bars for accuracy
- ON recommended (critical for charts >1 minute)
• [b>Precision TF [/b> (1/5 min): Timeframe for LTF sampling
- 1 min recommended (most accurate)
[b>Session ORBs: [/b>
• [b>Show Asian/London/NY ORB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display multi-session ranges
- OFF in Simple mode
- ON in Standard/Advanced if trading 24hr markets
• [b>Session Windows [/b>: Time ranges for each session ORB
- Defaults align with major session opens
[b>Initial Balance: [/b>
• [b>Show IB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display Initial Balance levels
- ON recommended for day type classification
• [b>IB Session Window [/b> (0930-1030): First hour of trading
- Default is standard for US equities
• [b>Show IB Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project IB extension targets
- ON recommended (identifies trend days)
• [b>IB Extensions 1-4 [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x): Extension multipliers
- Defaults are Market Profile standard
[b>ORB Extensions: [/b>
• [b>Show Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project ORB extension targets
- ON recommended (defines profit targets)
• [b>Enable Individual Extensions [/b> (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, 2.618x, 3.0x)
- Enable 1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x minimum
- Disable 2.618x and 3.0x unless trading very volatile instruments
[b>Breakout Detection:
• [b>Confirmation Method [/b> (Close/Wick/Body):
- Close recommended (best balance)
- Wick for scalping
- Body for conservative
• [b>Require Volume Confirmation [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (increases reliability)
• [b>Volume Multiplier [/b> (1.0-3.0):
- 1.5x recommended
- Lower for thin instruments
- Higher for heavy volume instruments
[b>Failed Breakout System: [/b>
• [b>Enable Failed Breakouts [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON strongly recommended (highest edge)
• [b>Bars to Confirm Failure [/b> (2-10):
- 3 bars recommended
- 2 for aggressive (more signals, more false failures)
- 5+ for conservative (fewer signals, higher quality)
• [b>Failure Buffer [/b> (0.0-0.5 ATR):
- 0.1 ATR recommended
- Filters noise during consolidation near ORB level
• [b>Show Reversal Targets [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (visualizes trade plan)
• [b>Reversal Target Mults [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x):
- Defaults are tested values
- Adjust based on average daily range
[b>Gap Analysis:
• [b>Show Gap Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON if trading instruments that gap frequently
- OFF for 24hr markets (forex, crypto—no gaps)
• [b>Gap Fill Target [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON to visualize previous close (gap fill level)
[b>VWAP:
• [b>Show VWAP [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (key institutional level)
• [b>Show VWAP Bands [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON in Standard/Advanced
- OFF in Simple
• [b>Band Multipliers (1.0σ, 2.0σ):
- Defaults are standard
- 1σ = normal range, 2σ = extreme
[b>Day Type: [/b>
• [b>Show Day Type Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (critical for strategy adaptation)
• [b>Trend Day Threshold [/b> (1.0-2.5 IB mult):
- 1.5x recommended
- When price extends >1.5x IB, classifies as Trend Day
[b>Enhanced Visuals:
• [b>Show Momentum Candles [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for visual context
- OFF if chart gets too colorful
• [b>Show Gradient Zone Fills [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for professional look
- OFF for minimalist chart
• [b>Label Display Mode [/b> (All/Adaptive/Minimal):
- Adaptive recommended (shows nearby labels only)
- All for information density
- Minimal for clean chart
• [b>Label Proximity [/b> (1.0-5.0 ATR):
- 3.0 ATR recommended
- Labels beyond this distance are hidden (Adaptive mode)
[b>🎓 PROFESSIONAL USAGE PROTOCOL [/b>
[b>Phase 1: Learning the System (Week 1) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Understand ORB concepts and dashboard interpretation
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Display Mode: STANDARD
• ORB Timeframe: 30 minutes
• Enable ALL features (IB, extensions, failed breakouts, VWAP, gap analysis)
• Enable statistics tracking
[b>Actions: [/b>
• Paper trade ONLY—no real money
• Observe ORB formation every day (9:30-10:00 AM ET for US markets)
• Note when ORB breakouts occur and if they extend
• Note when breakouts fail and reversals happen
• Watch day type classification evolve during session
• Track statistics—which setups are working?
[b>Key Learning: [/b>
• How often do breakouts reach 1.5x extension? (typically 50-60% of confirmed breakouts)
• How often do breakouts fail? (typically 30-40%)
• Which setup grade (A/B/C) actually performs best? (should see A-grade outperforming)
• What day type produces best results? (trend days favor breakouts, rotation days favor fades)
[b>Phase 2: Parameter Optimization (Week 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Tune system to your instrument and timeframe
[b>ORB Timeframe Selection:
• Run 5 days with 15-minute ORB
• Run 5 days with 30-minute ORB
• Compare: Which captures better breakouts on your instrument?
• Typically: 30-minute optimal for most, 15-minute for very liquid (ES, SPY)
[b>Volume Confirmation Testing:
• Run 5 days WITH volume confirmation
• Run 5 days WITHOUT volume confirmation
• Compare: Does volume confirmation increase win rate?
• If win rate improves by >5%: Keep volume confirmation ON
• If no improvement: Turn OFF (avoid missing valid breakouts)
[b>Failed Breakout Bars:
[b>Goal: [/b> Develop personal trading rules based on system signals
[b>Setup Selection Rules: [/b>
Define which setups you'll trade:
• [b>Conservative: [/b> Only A+ and A grades
• [b>Balanced: [/b> A+, A, B+ grades
• [b>Aggressive: [/b> All grades B and above
Test each approach for 5-10 trades, compare results.
[b>Position Sizing by Grade: [/b>
Consider risk-weighting by setup quality:
• A+ grade: 100% position size
• A grade: 75% position size
• B+ grade: 50% position size
• B grade: 25% position size
Example: If max risk is $1000/trade:
• A+ setup: Risk $1000
• A setup: Risk $750
• B+ setup: Risk $500
This matches bet sizing to edge.
[b>Day Type Adaptation: [/b>
Create rules for different day types:
Trend Days:
• Take ALL breakout signals (A/B/C grades)
• Hold for 2.0x extension minimum
• Trail stops aggressively (1.0 ATR trail)
• DON'T fade—reversals unlikely
Rotation Days:
• ONLY take failed breakout reversals
• Ignore initial breakout signals (likely to fail)
• Take profits quickly (0.5x extension)
• Focus on fade setups (Fade High/Fade Low)
Normal Days:
• Take A/A+ breakout signals only
• Take ALL failed breakout reversals (high probability)
• Target 1.0-1.5x extensions
• Partial profit-taking at extensions
Time-of-Day Rules: [/b>
Breakouts at different times have different probabilities:
10:00-10:30 AM (Early Breakout):
• ORB just completed
• Fresh breakout
• Probability: Moderate (50-55% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Conservative position sizing
10:30-12:00 PM (Mid-Morning):
• Momentum established
• Volume still healthy
• Probability: High (60-65% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Standard position sizing
12:00-2:00 PM (Lunch Doldrums):
• Volume dries up
• Whipsaw risk increases
• Probability: Low (40-45% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Avoid new entries OR reduce size 50%
2:00-4:00 PM (Afternoon Session):
• Late-day positioning
• EOD squeezes possible
• Probability: Moderate-High (55-60%)
• Strategy: Watch for IB break—if trending all day, follow
[b>Phase 4: Live Micro-Sizing (Month 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Validate paper trading results with minimal risk
[b>Setup: [/b>
• 10-20% of intended full position size
• Take ONLY A+ and A grade setups
• Follow stop loss and targets religiously
[b>Execution: [/b>
• Execute from alerts OR from dashboard setup box
• Entry: Close of signal bar OR next bar market order
• Stop: Use exact stop from setup (don't widen)
• Targets: Scale out at T1/T2/T3 as indicated
[b>Tracking: [/b>
• Log every trade: Entry, Exit, Grade, Outcome, Day Type
• Calculate: Win rate, Average R-multiple, Max consecutive losses
• Compare to paper trading results (should be within 15%)
[b>Red Flags: [/b>
• Win rate <45%: System not suitable for this instrument/timeframe
• Major divergence from paper trading: Execution issues (slippage, late entries, emotional exits)
• Max consecutive losses >8: Hitting rough patch OR market regime changed
[b>Phase 5: Scaling Up (Months 3-6)
[b>Goal: [/b> Gradually increase to full position size
[b>Progression: [/b>
• Month 3: 25-40% size (if micro-sizing profitable)
• Month 4: 40-60% size
• Month 5: 60-80% size
• Month 6: 80-100% size
[b>Milestones Required to Scale Up: [/b>
• Minimum 30 trades at current size
• Win rate ≥48%
• Profit factor ≥1.2
• Max drawdown <20%
• Emotional control (no revenge trading, no FOMO)
[b>Advanced Techniques:
[b>Multi-Timeframe ORB: Assumes first 30-60 minutes establish value. Violation: Market opens after major news, price discovery continues for hours (opening range meaningless).
2. [b>Volume Indicates Conviction: ES, NQ, RTY, SPY, QQQ—high liquidity, clean ORB formation, reliable extensions
• [b>Large-Cap Stocks: AAPL, MSFT, TSLA, NVDA (>$5B market cap, >5M daily volume)
• [b>Liquid Futures: CL (crude oil), GC (gold), 6E (EUR/USD), ZB (bonds)—24hr markets benefit from session ORBs
• [b>Major Forex Pairs: [/b> EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY—London/NY session ORBs work well
[b>Performs Poorly On: [/b>
• [b>Illiquid Stocks: <$1M daily volume, wide spreads, gappy price action
• [b>Penny Stocks: [/b> Manipulated, pump-and-dump, no real price discovery
• [b>Low-Volume ETFs: Exotic sector ETFs, leveraged products with thin volume
• [b>Crypto on Sketchy Exchanges: Wash trading, spoofing invalidates volume analysis
• [b>Earnings Days: [/b> ORB completes before earnings release, then completely resets (useless)
• Binary Event Days: FDA approvals, court rulings—discontinuous price action
[b>Known Weaknesses: [/b>
• [b>Slow Starts: ORB doesn't complete until 10:00 AM (30-min ORB). Early morning traders have no signals for 30 minutes. Consider using 15-minute ORB if this is problematic.
• [b>Failure Detection Lag: [/b> Failed breakout requires 3+ bars to confirm. By the time system signals reversal, price may have already moved significantly back inside range. Manual traders watching in real-time can enter earlier.
• [b>Extension Overshoot: [/b> System projects extensions mathematically (1.5x, 2.0x, etc.). Actual moves may stop short (1.3x) or overshoot (2.2x). Extensions are targets, not magnets.
• [b>Day Type Misclassification: [/b> Early in session, day type is "Developing." By the time it's classified definitively (often 11:00 AM+), half the day is over. Strategy adjustments happen late.
• [b>Gap Assumptions: [/b> System assumes gaps want to fill. Strong trend days never fill gaps (gap becomes support/resistance forever). Blindly trading toward gaps can backfire on trend days.
• [b>Volume Data Quality: Forex doesn't have centralized volume (uses tick volume as proxy—less reliable). Crypto volume is often fake (wash trading). Volume confirmation less effective on these instruments.
• [b>Multi-Session Complexity: [/b> When using Asian/London/NY ORBs simultaneously, chart becomes cluttered. Requires discipline to focus on relevant session for current time.
[b>Risk Factors: [/b>
• [b>Opening Gaps: Large gaps (>2%) can create distorted ORBs. Opening range might be unusually wide or narrow, making extensions unreliable.
• [b>Low Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX <12, opening ranges can be tiny (0.2-0.3%). Extensions are equally tiny. Profit targets don't justify commission/slippage.
• [b>High Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX >30, opening ranges are huge (2-3%+). Extensions project unrealistic targets. Failed breakouts happen faster (volatility whipsaw).
• [b>Algorithm Dominance:[/b> In heavily algorithmic markets (ES during overnight session), ORB levels can be manipulated—algos pin price to ORB high/low intentionally. Breakouts become stop-runs rather than genuine directional moves.
[b>⚠️ RISK DISCLOSURE[/b>
Trading futures, stocks, options, forex, and cryptocurrencies involves substantial risk of loss and is not suitable for all investors. Opening Range Breakout strategies, while based on sound market structure principles, do not guarantee profits and can result in significant losses.
The ORB Fusion indicator implements professional trading concepts including Opening Range theory, Market Profile Initial Balance analysis, Fibonacci extensions, and failed breakout reversal logic. These methodologies have theoretical foundations but past performance—whether backtested or live—is not indicative of future results.
Opening Range theory assumes the first 30-60 minutes of trading establish a meaningful value area and that breakouts from this range signal directional conviction. This assumption may not hold during:
• Major news events (FOMC, NFP, earnings surprises)
• Market structure changes (circuit breakers, trading halts)
• Low liquidity periods (holidays, early closures)
• Algorithmic manipulation or spoofing
Failed breakout detection relies on patterns of trapped participant behavior. While historically these patterns have shown statistical edges, market conditions change. Institutional algorithms, changing market structure, or regime shifts can reduce or eliminate edges that existed historically.
Initial Balance classification (trend day vs rotation day vs normal day) is a heuristic framework, not a deterministic prediction. Day type can change mid-session. Early classification may prove incorrect as the day develops.
Extension projections (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, etc.) are probabilistic targets derived from Fibonacci ratios and empirical market behavior. They are not "support and resistance levels" that price must reach or respect. Markets can stop short of extensions, overshoot them, or ignore them entirely.
Volume confirmation assumes high volume indicates institutional participation and conviction. In algorithmic markets, volume can be artificially high (HFT activity) or artificially low (dark pools, internalization). Volume is a proxy, not a guarantee of conviction.
LTF precision sampling improves ORB accuracy by using 1-minute bars but introduces additional data dependencies. If 1-minute data is unavailable, inaccurate, or delayed, ORB calculations will be incorrect.
The grading system (A+/A/B+/B/C/D) and confidence scores aggregate multiple factors (volume, VWAP, day type, IB expansion, gap context) into a single assessment. This is a mechanical calculation, not artificial intelligence. The system cannot adapt to unprecedented market conditions or events outside its programmed logic.
Real trading involves slippage, commissions, latency, partial fills, and rejected orders not present in indicator calculations. ORB Fusion generates signals at bar close; actual fills occur with delay. Opening range forms during highest volatility (first 30 minutes)—spreads widen, slippage increases. Execution quality significantly impacts realized results.
Statistics tracking (win rates, extension levels reached, day type distribution) is based on historical bars in your lookback window. If lookback is small (<50 bars) or market regime changed, statistics may not represent future probabilities.
Users must independently validate system performance on their specific instruments, timeframes, and broker execution environment. Paper trade extensively (100+ trades minimum) before risking capital. Start with micro position sizing (5-10% of intended size) for 50+ trades to validate execution quality matches expectations.
Never risk more than you can afford to lose completely. Use proper position sizing (0.5-2% risk per trade maximum). Implement stop losses on every single trade without exception. Understand that most retail traders lose money—sophisticated indicators do not change this fundamental reality. They systematize analysis but cannot eliminate risk.
The developer makes no warranties regarding profitability, suitability, accuracy, reliability, or fitness for any purpose. Users assume full responsibility for all trading decisions, parameter selections, risk management, and outcomes.
By using this indicator, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and accepted these risk disclosures and limitations, and you accept full responsibility for all trading activity and potential losses.
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
[b>CLOSING STATEMENT[/b>
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
Opening Range Breakout is not a trick. It's a framework. The first 30-60 minutes reveal where participants believe value lies. Breakouts signal directional conviction. Failures signal trapped participants. Extensions define profit targets. Day types dictate strategy. Failed breakouts create the highest-probability reversals.
ORB Fusion doesn't predict the future—it identifies [b>structure[/b>, detects [b>breakouts[/b>, recognizes [b>failures[/b>, and generates [b>probabilistic trade plans[/b> with defined risk and reward.
The edge is not in the opening range itself. The edge is in recognizing when the market respects structure (follow breakouts) versus when it violates structure (fade breakouts). The edge is in detecting failures faster than discretionary traders. The edge is in systematic classification that prevents catastrophic errors—like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
Most indicators draw lines. ORB Fusion implements a complete institutional trading methodology: Opening Range theory, Market Profile classification, failed breakout intelligence, Fibonacci projections, volume confirmation, gap psychology, and real-time performance tracking.
Whether you're a beginner learning market structure or a professional seeking systematic ORB implementation, this system provides the framework.
"The market's first word is its opening range. Everything after is commentary." — ORB Fusion
Kinetic Scalper [BULLBYTE]KINETIC SCALPER - ADVANCED MOMENTUM & CONFLUENCE TRADING SYSTEM
A SOPHISTICATED MULTI-FACTOR ANALYSIS INDICATOR FOR PRECISION ENTRIES
The Kinetic Scalper is a comprehensive trading analysis tool that combines volume-weighted momentum calculations, multi-oscillator divergence detection, and a proprietary 15-factor confluence scoring system to identify high-probability reversal setups across all timeframes.
WHAT MAKES THIS INDICATOR ORIGINAL
This is NOT a simple mashup of existing indicators.
The Kinetic Scalper features a completely custom momentum engine called the "Kinetic Pulse" - a volume-weighted momentum oscillator with Fisher Transform normalization that fundamentally differs from standard RSI or other momentum indicators. Every component feeds into a unified algorithmic framework designed specifically for this system.
KEY INNOVATIONS:
KINETIC PULSE ENGINE
Unlike standard RSI which uses simple price changes, the Kinetic Pulse applies:
→ Volume weighting to price movements (high-volume moves carry more weight)
→ EMA smoothing instead of traditional SMA (faster response to changes)
→ Fisher Transform normalization for improved signal clarity
→ Adaptive period adjustment based on current volatility regime
→ Result: A momentum oscillator that responds to conviction, not just price noise
15-FACTOR CONFLUENCE SCORING SYSTEM
Every signal is graded based on the number of confirming factors present:
→ Momentum position (oversold/overbought extremes)
→ Momentum velocity (direction change confirmation)
→ Momentum acceleration (strength of reversal)
→ Multi-oscillator divergence (price vs. 3 oscillators)
→ Volume confirmation (above-average participation)
→ Volume delta analysis (buying vs. selling pressure)
→ Higher timeframe alignment (trend confirmation from larger timeframe)
→ Session timing (major forex session awareness)
→ Structure clearance (clear path to profit targets)
→ Support/resistance proximity (confluence with key levels)
→ Market regime filtering (trending vs. choppy conditions)
Signals are graded A+, A, or B based on how many factors align:
• CONSERVATIVE MODE: A+ requires 12+ factors, A requires 9+, B requires 7+
• BALANCED MODE: A+ requires 10+ factors, A requires 7+, B requires 5+
• AGGRESSIVE MODE: A+ requires 8+ factors, A requires 5+, B requires 3+
TRADE ANALYSIS STATE MACHINE
A sophisticated monitoring system that tracks trade conditions in real-time using:
→ 5-state analysis framework (Factors Aligned / Positive Bias / Mixed Signals / Factors Weakening / Negative Bias)
→ Hysteresis-based transitions (different thresholds to enter vs. exit states)
→ Confidence smoothing with EMA (reduces noise, prevents flip-flopping)
→ Minimum commitment periods before state changes
→ Override logic for significant events (near TP/SL, momentum reversals)
→ Result: Stable, actionable guidance that doesn't change on every bar
INSTRUMENT-AWARE CALIBRATION
Automatically detects what you're trading and applies optimized parameters:
→ Forex Majors: Standard ATR, high session weight
→ Forex Crosses: Tighter stops, moderate session weight
→ Crypto: Wider stops (1.8x multiplier), reduced session weight (24/7 markets)
→ Indices: Moderate-wide stops, high session weight
→ Commodities: Moderate stops, moderate session weight
WHAT THIS INDICATOR DOES
The Kinetic Scalper is designed to identify high-confluence reversal opportunities by analyzing multiple dimensions of market behavior simultaneously.
CORE FUNCTIONS:
1. SIGNAL GENERATION
→ Identifies potential reversal points at oversold/overbought extremes
→ Confirms with multi-oscillator divergence detection
→ Validates with volume, higher timeframe, and structural analysis
→ Filters out low-probability setups automatically
→ Grades signals based on total confluence factors present
2. AUTOMATED TRADE TRACKING
→ Calculates structure-based or ATR-based stop loss levels
→ Projects take profit targets using risk-to-reward ratios
→ Monitors live position status (P/L, distance to targets, R-multiple)
→ Tracks TP1 and TP2 hits automatically
→ Displays outcome markers (TP HIT, PARTIAL WIN, STOPPED)
3. REAL-TIME CONDITION MONITORING
→ Analyzes 6 factor categories during active trades
→ Provides confidence scoring (0-100 scale)
→ Generates actionable guidance based on current market state
→ Alerts when conditions deteriorate or improve
→ Helps with trade management decisions
4. COMPREHENSIVE MARKET ANALYSIS
→ Session detection (Asian, London, New York, Overlap)
→ Volatility regime identification (Low, Normal, High, Extreme)
→ Trend state classification (Trending Up/Down, Ranging, Transitioning)
→ Volume analysis (relative volume and delta approximation)
→ Choppiness filtering (blocks signals in ranging markets)
WHY USE THIS INDICATOR
PROBLEM: Most momentum indicators generate too many false signals at extremes.
SOLUTION: The Kinetic Scalper requires MULTIPLE confirming factors before generating a signal, dramatically reducing noise and focusing on high-confluence setups.
ADVANTAGES:
✓ QUALITY OVER QUANTITY
→ Signal grading ensures you can filter for only the highest-quality setups
→ A+ signals have 10-12+ confirming factors aligned
→ Cooldown periods prevent over-trading the same move
✓ COMPLETE TRADE FRAMEWORK
→ Entry signals with confluence justification
→ Calculated stop loss based on market structure or ATR
→ Two profit targets with clear risk-to-reward ratios
→ Live trade monitoring with factor analysis
→ Outcome tracking and visual markers
✓ ADAPTIVE TO MARKET CONDITIONS
→ Volatility-based period adjustment for momentum calculations
→ Instrument-specific ATR multipliers
→ Session awareness for forex traders
→ Higher timeframe trend filtering
→ Automatic regime detection (trending vs. choppy)
✓ TRANSPARENT METHODOLOGY
→ Every input has detailed tooltips explaining its purpose
→ Signal tooltips show exactly why a signal was generated
→ Dashboard displays all relevant market conditions
→ Factor scores are visible during trades
→ No "black box" mystery calculations
✓ NON-REPAINTING & RELIABLE
→ All signals use barstate.isconfirmed (only on closed bars)
→ Higher timeframe data uses lookahead_off with historical offset
→ No future data access or repainting behavior
→ What you see is what you get - signals don't disappear or move
HOW THE INDICATOR WORKS
SIGNAL GENERATION PROCESS:
STEP 1: MOMENTUM ANALYSIS
The Kinetic Pulse engine calculates volume-weighted momentum:
→ Price changes are weighted by volume ratio vs. 20-bar average
→ High-volume moves have more influence on the oscillator
→ Gains and losses are smoothed using EMA (not SMA like RSI)
→ Fisher Transform is applied for normalization to 0-100 scale
→ Result: Momentum reading that emphasizes conviction, not noise
STEP 2: REVERSAL DETECTION
The indicator looks for potential reversal conditions:
→ Kinetic Pulse reaching oversold zone (below dynamic lower threshold)
→ Momentum velocity turning positive after being negative (for longs)
→ OR bullish divergence detected on multiple oscillators
→ Price making lower lows while oscillators make higher lows = divergence
STEP 3: MULTI-OSCILLATOR DIVERGENCE CONFIRMATION
Divergence is validated across three sources:
→ Kinetic Pulse divergence
→ CCI divergence
→ Stochastic divergence
→ Multiple oscillators confirming divergence increases signal reliability
STEP 4: CONFLUENCE FACTOR SCORING
The system evaluates all 15 possible confirming factors:
→ Momentum position: Is pulse oversold/overbought? (+0 to +2 points)
→ Momentum direction: Is velocity reversing? (+0 to +2 points)
→ Momentum acceleration: Is reversal strengthening? (+0 to +1 point)
→ Divergence count: How many oscillators show divergence? (+0 to +2 points)
→ Volume strength: Is volume above 1.3x average? (+0 to +1 point)
→ Volume delta: Is cumulative delta positive/negative? (+0 to +1 point)
→ HTF alignment: Does higher timeframe support direction? (+0 to +2 points)
→ Session timing: Is it a prime trading session? (+0 to +1 point)
→ Clear air: Is path to targets clear of obstacles? (+0 to +1 point)
→ Structure confluence: Are we near support/resistance? (+0 to +1 point)
→ Market regime: Is market trending, not choppy? (+0 to +1 point)
Total possible score: 15 points
Minimum for signal: 3-12 points depending on sensitivity mode
STEP 5: FILTER VALIDATION
Before generating a signal, additional checks are performed:
→ Volume must be above minimum threshold (if filter enabled)
→ Higher timeframe must not oppose the signal direction (if filter enabled)
→ Target path must be clear of major resistance/support (if filter enabled)
→ Volatility must not be EXTREME (blocks signals in chaos)
→ Risk-to-reward ratio must meet minimum requirement
→ Cooldown period must have elapsed since last signal
STEP 6: SIGNAL GRADING
If all filters pass, the signal is graded based on score:
→ A+ Grade: Highest confluence (8-12+ factors depending on sensitivity)
→ A Grade: High confluence (5-9+ factors)
→ B Grade: Moderate confluence (3-7+ factors)
Only graded signals (A+, A, or B) are displayed.
STEP 7: TRADE LEVEL CALCULATION
Stop loss and targets are calculated automatically:
STOP LOSS METHODS:
• Structure-Based: Uses recent swing low/high with ATR buffer, constrained by min/max ATR limits
• ATR-Based: Pure ATR multiplier with min/max constraints
• Fixed ATR: Simple ATR multiplier, no adjustments
TARGET CALCULATION:
• TP1: Entry ± (Stop Distance × Target 1 R:R)
• TP2: Entry ± (Stop Distance × Target 2 R:R)
• Default: TP1 at 1.0 R:R (1:1), TP2 at 2.0 R:R (1:2)
STEP 8: TRADE MONITORING
Once a signal is taken, the indicator tracks:
→ Current P/L in ticks and R-multiples
→ Distance to each target in ATR units
→ Distance to stop loss in ATR units
→ TP1 hit detection (marks with label, updates lines)
→ TP2 hit detection (closes trade, marks outcome)
→ Stop loss hit detection (closes trade, differentiates partial vs. full loss)
STEP 9: FACTOR ANALYSIS (DURING TRADES)
The Trade Analysis Panel monitors 6 key factor categories:
→ Momentum: Is momentum still aligned with trade direction? (-15 to +15 pts)
→ Position: Current R-multiple position (-12 to +12 pts)
→ Volume: Is volume still supportive? (-6 to +6 pts)
→ HTF Alignment: Does HTF still support trade? (-6 to +8 pts)
→ Target Proximity: How close are we to targets? (0 to +10 pts)
→ Stop Proximity: Are we dangerously close to stop? (-15 to +3 pts)
Raw scores are summed and smoothed using 5-bar EMA to create Confidence Score (0-100).
STEP 10: STATE MACHINE TRANSITIONS
Based on smoothed confidence, the system transitions between 5 states:
→ FACTORS ALIGNED (72+): Everything looks good
→ POSITIVE BIAS (58-72): Conditions favorable
→ MIXED SIGNALS (48-58): Neutral conditions
→ FACTORS WEAKENING (22-48): Concerning signals
→ NEGATIVE BIAS (<22): Poor conditions
Hysteresis prevents rapid flipping between states (different entry/exit thresholds).
RECOMMENDED TIMEFRAMES & INSTRUMENTS
TIMEFRAME VERSATILITY:
Despite the name "Scalper," this indicator works on ALL timeframes:
✓ LOWER TIMEFRAMES (1m - 15m)
→ Ideal for: Scalping and very short-term trades
→ Expect: More signals, faster trades, requires active monitoring
→ Best for: Forex majors, liquid crypto pairs
→ Tip: Use Conservative sensitivity to reduce noise
✓ MID TIMEFRAMES (15m - 1H)
→ Ideal for: Intraday trading and day trading
→ Expect: Moderate signal frequency, 1-4 hour trade duration
→ Best for: Forex, indices, major crypto
→ Tip: Balanced sensitivity works well here
✓ HIGHER TIMEFRAMES (4H - Daily)
→ Ideal for: Swing trading and position trading
→ Expect: Fewer signals, higher-quality setups, multi-day trades
→ Best for: All instruments
→ Tip: Can use Aggressive sensitivity for more opportunities
INSTRUMENT COMPATIBILITY:
✓ FOREX MAJORS (EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY, etc.)
→ Auto-detected or manually select "Forex Major"
→ Session filtering is highly valuable here
→ London/NY overlap generates best signals
✓ FOREX CROSSES (EUR/GBP, AUD/NZD, etc.)
→ Auto-detected or manually select "Forex Cross"
→ Slightly tighter stops applied automatically
→ Session weight reduced vs. majors
✓ CRYPTOCURRENCIES (BTC, ETH, SOL, etc.)
→ Auto-detected or manually select "Crypto"
→ Wider stops (1.8x multiplier) due to volatility
→ Session filtering less relevant (24/7 markets)
→ Works well on both spot and perpetual futures
✓ INDICES (S&P 500, NASDAQ, DAX, etc.)
→ Auto-detected or manually select "Index"
→ Session opens (NY, London) are important
→ Moderate stop widths applied
✓ COMMODITIES (Gold, Silver, Oil, etc.)
→ Auto-detected or manually select "Commodity"
→ Moderate stops and session awareness
→ Works well on both spot and futures
VISUAL ELEMENTS EXPLAINED
SIGNAL MARKERS:
The indicator offers 3 display styles (choose in settings):
• PREMIUM STYLE (Default)
→ Signal appears below/above candles with connecting line
→ Background panel with grade badge (LONG , SHORT , etc.)
→ Entry price displayed
→ Direction arrow pointing to entry candle
→ Most informative, best for detailed analysis
• MINIMAL STYLE
→ Simple dot marker with grade text next to it
→ Clean, unobtrusive design
→ Best for mobile devices or cluttered charts
→ Less visual noise
• CLASSIC STYLE
→ Diamond marker with grade badge below/above
→ Traditional indicator aesthetic
→ Good balance between info and simplicity
ALL STYLES INCLUDE:
→ Signal tooltips with complete trade plan details
→ Grade display (A+, A, or B)
→ Color coding (bright colors for A+, standard for A/B)
SIGNAL TOOLTIP CONTENTS:
When you hover over any signal marker, you'll see:
→ Signal direction and grade
→ Confluence score (actual points vs. required)
→ Reason for signal (divergence type, reversal pattern)
→ Complete trade plan (Entry, Stop, TP1, TP2)
→ Risk in ticks
→ Risk-to-reward ratios
→ Market conditions at signal (Pulse value, HTF status, Volume, Session)
TRADE LEVEL LINES:
When Trade Tracking is enabled:
• ENTRY LINE (Yellow/Gold)
→ Solid horizontal line at entry price
→ Shaded zone around entry (±ATR buffer)
→ Label showing entry price
→ Extends 20-25 bars into future
• STOP LOSS LINE (Orange/Red)
→ Dashed line at stop level
→ Label showing stop price and distance in ticks
→ Turns dotted and changes color after TP1 hit (breakeven implied)
→ Deleted when trade closes
• TAKE PROFIT 1 LINE (Blue)
→ Dotted line at TP1 level
→ Label showing price and R:R ratio (e.g., "1:1.0")
→ Turns solid and changes to green when hit
→ Deleted after TP1 hit
• TAKE PROFIT 2 LINE (Blue)
→ Solid line at TP2 level
→ Label showing price and R:R ratio (e.g., "1:2.0")
→ This is the "full win" target
→ Deleted when trade closes
OUTCOME MARKERS:
When trade milestones are reached:
• - Green label appears when first target is touched
• - Green label when second target is touched (trade complete)
• - Red label if stop loss hit before any target
• - Orange label if TP1 hit but then stopped out
PREVIOUS DAY LEVELS:
If enabled (Show Previous Day Levels):
• PDH (Previous Day High) - Solid red/orange line
→ Label shows "PDH: "
→ Useful resistance reference for intraday trading
• PDL (Previous Day Low) - Solid green line
→ Label shows "PDL: "
→ Useful support reference for intraday trading
BACKGROUND TINTS:
Subtle background colors indicate states:
→ Light green tint: Active long position being tracked
→ Light red tint: Active short position being tracked
→ Light orange tint: Extreme volatility warning (signals blocked)
DASHBOARD GUIDE
The indicator features TWO dashboard panels:
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
MAIN DASHBOARD (Top Right by default)
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
WHEN NO TRADE IS ACTIVE:
→ Bias: Current market bias (BULLISH, BEARISH, NEUTRAL, LEAN LONG/SHORT)
→ Based on Kinetic Pulse position and velocity
→ Helps you understand overall momentum direction
→ Pulse: Current Kinetic Pulse value (0-100 scale)
→ <30 = Oversold (potential long setups developing)
→ >70 = Overbought (potential short setups developing)
→ 40-60 = Neutral zone
→ Volatility: Current volatility regime (LOW, NORMAL, HIGH, EXTREME)
→ Calculated from ATR ratio vs. 100-period average
→ EXTREME volatility blocks all signals (too chaotic)
→ Trend: Market state classification
→ TREND UP / TREND DOWN: ADX > 25, directional movement clear
→ RANGING: ADX < 20, choppy conditions
→ TRANSITIONING: ADX 20-25, developing conditions
→ VOLATILE: Extreme ATR regime
→ Session: Current forex session
→ ASIAN (00:00-08:00 UTC)
→ LONDON (07:00-16:00 UTC)
→ NEW YORK (13:00-22:00 UTC)
→ LDN/NY (13:00-16:00 UTC) - Overlap period, highest volatility
→ OFF-HOURS: Outside major sessions
→ Volume: Current volume vs. 20-bar average
→ Displayed as multiplier (e.g., "1.45x" = 45% above average)
→ Green if >1.3x (high volume, bullish for signal quality)
→ Red if <0.8x (low volume, bearish for signal quality)
→ HTF: Higher timeframe analysis status
→ BULLISH: HTF momentum supports longs
→ BEARISH: HTF momentum supports shorts
→ NEUTRAL: No clear HTF direction
→ Best Score: Highest confluence score currently available
→ Shows both long and short scores
→ Format: " / "
→ Example: "8/7 " means long score is 8, threshold is 7, long is leading
→ Helps you anticipate which direction might signal next
→ PDH/PDL: Previous day high and low prices
→ Quick reference for intraday support/resistance
WHEN TRADE IS ACTIVE:
→ Trade: Direction and grade (e.g., "LONG ")
→ Entry: Entry price of current trade
→ P/L: Current profit/loss
→ Shown in ticks and R-multiples
→ Format: "+45 | +0.75R" or "-20 | -0.35R"
→ Green when positive, red when negative
→ TP1: First target status
→ Shows price and distance if not hit
→ Shows "HIT" in green if reached
→ TP2: Second target price and distance
→ Stop: Stop loss price and current distance from stop
→ Bars: Number of bars since entry (trade duration)
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
TRADE ANALYSIS PANEL (Bottom Left by default)
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
This panel provides algorithmic analysis of market conditions. It does NOT provide investment advice or recommendations.
WHEN NO TRADE IS ACTIVE:
Shows scanning status and signal readiness:
→ Long/Short Readiness Gauges
→ Visual bar showing proximity to signal threshold
→ Score display (e.g., "8/7" means 8 points scored, 7 needed)
→ "RDY" indicator when threshold reached
→ Status Messages
→ "Scanning for setups..." - Normal scanning mode
→ "Long setup ready - cooldown: X bars" - Signal qualified but in cooldown
→ "Oversold conditions - watch for reversal" - Setup developing
→ "Choppy conditions detected" - Warning about market state
→ "Extreme volatility - signals blocked" - Safety filter active
WHEN TRADE IS ACTIVE:
Header shows current analysis state:
→ FACTORS ALIGNED (Green) - Everything looks good, confidence 72+
→ POSITIVE BIAS (Light Green) - Conditions favorable, confidence 58-72
→ MIXED SIGNALS (Blue) - Neutral conditions, confidence 48-58
→ FACTORS WEAKENING (Orange) - Concerning signals, confidence 22-48
→ NEGATIVE BIAS (Red) - Poor conditions, confidence <22
Confidence Score:
→ Displayed as percentage (0-100%)
→ Visual gauge (|||||.....)
→ Trend indicator (Rising, Falling, Stable)
→ Shows momentum of confidence change
Factor Breakdown (if enabled):
Shows 6 factor categories with individual scores:
→ Momentum: Is momentum aligned with trade? (-15 to +15 points)
→ Positive if velocity matches trade direction
→ Negative if momentum opposes trade
→ Position: Current R-multiple analysis (-12 to +12 points)
→ Positive if trade is in profit
→ Negative if underwater
→ Score increases as profit grows
→ Volume: Is volume supportive? (-6 to +6 points)
→ Positive if volume above average
→ Negative if volume weak
→ HTF Align: Higher timeframe status (-6 to +8 points)
→ Positive if HTF still supports trade direction
→ Negative if HTF turned against trade
→ Target: Proximity to profit targets (0 to +10 points)
→ Higher score when approaching targets
→ Bonus if TP1 already hit and near TP2
→ Stop Dist: Distance from stop loss (-15 to +3 points)
→ Negative if dangerously close to stop (<0.3 ATR)
→ Positive if well away from stop (>1.5 ATR)
Each factor shows:
• Score value with +/- indicator
• Trend symbol: + (improving), - (deteriorating), = (stable)
• Visual gauge
Guidance Messages:
→ "TARGET 2 APPROACHING" - TP2 within 0.3 ATR
→ "TARGET 1 APPROACHING" - TP1 within 0.3 ATR
→ "STOP PROXIMITY WARNING" - Stop within 0.3 ATR
→ "Factors aligned - Holding" - Positive state, stay in trade
→ "Conditions favorable" - Still looking good
→ "Conditions mixed - " - Neutral assessment
→ "Factors deteriorating" - Warning of weakening setup
→ "Confluence weakening - secure gains" - Consider exit if profitable
COMPACT MODE (Mobile-Friendly):
→ Reduces panel size by showing only essential info
→ Factor icons instead of full breakdowns
→ Simplified guidance messages
→ Perfect for smaller screens
SETTINGS GUIDE
MASTER SETTINGS:
Instrument Type
→ Purpose: Optimizes ATR multipliers and session weights for your asset
→ Options: Auto-Detect (recommended), Forex Major, Forex Cross, Crypto, Index, Commodity
→ Default: Auto-Detect
→ When to change: If auto-detection is incorrect for your symbol
Signal Sensitivity
→ Purpose: Controls how many factors required before generating signals
→ Options:
• Conservative: Requires 12+ for A+, 9+ for A, 7+ for B (fewer, highest quality)
• Balanced: Requires 10+ for A+, 7+ for A, 5+ for B (recommended)
• Aggressive: Requires 8+ for A+, 5+ for A, 3+ for B (more frequent)
→ Default: Balanced
→ When to change: If you want fewer signals (Conservative) or more opportunities (Aggressive)
Enable Trade Signals
→ Purpose: Master on/off switch for signal generation
→ Default: ON
→ When to disable: If you only want to use the analysis dashboards without signals
Enable Trade Tracking
→ Purpose: Tracks active trades and monitors conditions until TP/SL hit
→ Default: ON
→ When to disable: If you manage trades manually and don't want automatic tracking
Show Entry/Stop/Target Levels
→ Purpose: Displays trade plan lines and labels on chart
→ Default: ON
→ When to disable: If you prefer clean charts or manage levels yourself
DISPLAY SETTINGS:
Color Theme
→ Purpose: Optimizes colors for your chart background
→ Options: Dark (for dark charts), Light (for light charts)
→ Default: Dark
Signal Display Style
→ Purpose: Visual style of signal markers
→ Options:
• Premium: Badge with line and background panel (most detailed)
• Minimal: Simple dot with grade text (cleanest)
• Classic: Diamond marker with badge (traditional)
→ Default: Premium
Signal Distance
→ Purpose: How far signal labels appear from price bars (in ATR units)
→ Range: 0.5 to 10.0
→ Default: 2.0
→ When to adjust: Increase to 3.0-4.0 if signals hide behind candle wicks
TP/SL Label Distance
→ Purpose: Spacing of price labels to prevent overlap
→ Range: 0.5 to 5.0
→ Default: 1.5
Show Previous Day Levels
→ Purpose: Display PDH/PDL reference lines
→ Default: ON
→ Best for: Intraday traders who respect previous day levels
MAIN DASHBOARD:
Show Main Dashboard
→ Purpose: Toggle visibility of market conditions table
→ Default: ON
Main Dashboard Position
→ Options: Top Right, Top Left, Bottom Right, Bottom Left
→ Default: Top Right
→ When to change: To avoid overlap with TradingView's built-in panels
TRADE ANALYSIS PANEL:
Show Trade Analysis Panel
→ Purpose: Toggle factor analysis dashboard
→ Default: ON
Analysis Panel Position
→ Options: Top Right, Top Left, Bottom Right, Bottom Left, Middle Right, Middle Left
→ Default: Bottom Left
→ Recommended: Bottom Right or Middle Right to avoid overlap with Main Dashboard
Compact Mode
→ Purpose: Reduces panel size for mobile or smaller screens
→ Default: OFF
→ When to enable: Mobile trading, small screens, or minimalist preference
Show Factor Details
→ Purpose: Displays individual factor scores vs. overall confidence only
→ Default: ON
→ When to disable: For more compact view showing only state and confidence
RISK MANAGEMENT:
Stop Loss Method
→ Purpose: How stop loss distance is calculated
→ Options:
• Structure-Based: Uses swing highs/lows with ATR buffer (recommended)
• ATR-Based: Pure ATR multiplier with min/max constraints
• Fixed ATR: Simple multiplier, no adjustments
→ Default: Structure-Based
→ Impact: Structure-Based respects market geometry but constrains within safe limits
ATR Stop Multiplier
→ Purpose: Multiplier for ATR-based stop calculation
→ Range: 0.5 to 3.0
→ Default: 1.5
→ When to adjust:
• Increase to 2.0-2.5 for more breathing room (fewer false stops)
• Decrease to 1.0-1.2 for tighter stops (but more stop-outs)
Maximum Stop Distance (ATR)
→ Purpose: Cap on stop width to prevent excessive risk
→ Range: 1.0 to 5.0
→ Default: 2.5
→ Impact: If structure-based stop exceeds this, ATR-based stop is used instead
Minimum Stop Distance (ATR)
→ Purpose: Floor on stop width to avoid noise-induced stops
→ Range: 0.2 to 1.0
→ Default: 0.5
→ Impact: Prevents stops too tight to survive normal volatility
Target 1 Risk/Reward Ratio
→ Purpose: R:R for first profit target
→ Range: 0.5 to 2.0
→ Default: 1.0 (1:1 ratio)
→ Common values: 1.0 for quick profit taking, 1.5 for patient trading
Target 2 Risk/Reward Ratio
→ Purpose: R:R for second profit target (full win)
→ Range: 1.0 to 4.0
→ Default: 2.0 (1:2 ratio)
→ Common values: 2.0-3.0 for balanced risk/reward
Minimum R:R Required
→ Purpose: Filters out signals with poor risk/reward
→ Range: 0.5 to 2.0
→ Default: 1.0
→ Impact: Signals where potential reward doesn't meet this ratio are rejected
→ WARNING: Always ensure your position sizing means a stop loss = no more than 1-2% of your account, regardless of R:R ratio
SIGNAL FILTERS:
Session Awareness
→ Purpose: Weights signals higher during major forex sessions
→ Default: ON
→ Impact: Doesn't block signals, but session quality factors into scoring
→ Best for: Forex traders
Session Timezone
→ Purpose: Timezone for session calculations
→ Options: UTC, America/New_York, Europe/London, Asia/Tokyo, Asia/Hong_Kong
→ Default: UTC
→ When to change: Match your broker's server time
Higher Timeframe Alignment
→ Purpose: Checks HTF momentum before generating signals
→ Default: ON
→ Impact: Filters counter-trend signals, improves quality
→ Recommended: Keep enabled
HTF Timeframe
→ Purpose: Which higher timeframe to check
→ Default: Auto (blank field)
→ Auto selection:
• 1m chart → 5m HTF
• 5m chart → 15m HTF
• 15m chart → 1H HTF
• 1H chart → 4H HTF
• 4H+ chart → Daily HTF
→ Manual override: Enter any timeframe (e.g., "60" for 1-hour)
Volume Confirmation
→ Purpose: Requires above-average volume for signals
→ Default: ON
→ Impact: Filters low-liquidity false signals
→ Recommended: Keep enabled
Minimum Volume Ratio
→ Purpose: Volume threshold vs. 20-bar average
→ Range: 0.3 to 2.0
→ Default: 0.8 (80% of average)
→ When to adjust:
• Increase to 1.2-1.5 for only high-volume signals
• Decrease to 0.5-0.7 for more permissive filtering
Structure Clearance Check
→ Purpose: Ensures clear path to targets (no nearby resistance/support)
→ Default: ON
→ Impact: Prevents trades with immediate obstacles
→ Recommended: Keep enabled
Minimum Bars Between Signals
→ Purpose: Cooldown period after each signal
→ Range: 1 to 10
→ Default: 3
→ Impact: After a signal, this many bars must pass before another in same direction
→ When to adjust:
• Increase to 5-7 to prevent over-trading
• Decrease to 1-2 for faster re-entries
ADVANCED TUNING:
Momentum Period
→ Purpose: Base period for Kinetic Pulse calculation
→ Range: 5 to 30
→ Default: 14
→ When to adjust:
• Lower (8-10): More responsive, noisier
• Higher (18-21): Smoother, slower to react
→ Note: If Adaptive Period enabled, this is adjusted automatically
Adaptive Period
→ Purpose: Auto-adjusts momentum period based on volatility
→ Default: ON
→ Impact: Shortens period in high volatility, lengthens in low volatility
→ Recommended: Keep enabled for automatic optimization
Divergence Lookback
→ Purpose: How far back to search for divergence patterns
→ Range: 10 to 60
→ Default: 30
→ When to adjust:
• Shorter (15-20): Only recent divergences
• Longer (40-50): Catches older divergences (may be less relevant)
Swing Detection Bars
→ Purpose: Bars required on each side to confirm swing high/low
→ Range: 2 to 7
→ Default: 3
→ Impact on stops:
• Lower (2-3): More swing points, potentially tighter stops
• Higher (5-7): Only major swings, wider stops
Choppiness Index Threshold
→ Purpose: Threshold above which market considered choppy
→ Range: 38.2 to 80.0
→ Default: 61.8
→ Impact:
• Lower (50-55): Stricter quality filter (fewer signals in ranging markets)
• Higher (65-70): More permissive (allows signals in choppier conditions)
HOW TO READ SIGNALS
SIGNAL ANATOMY:
When a signal appears, you'll see:
1. DIRECTIONAL MARKER
→ Arrow, dot, or diamond pointing to entry candle (depends on style)
→ Positioned below price for LONG, above price for SHORT
→ Connected to price with line (Premium style)
2. GRADE BADGE
→ Displays signal quality: LONG , SHORT , etc.
→ Color coding:
• Bright green/cyan for A+ longs
• Standard green for A/B longs
• Bright pink/magenta for A+ shorts
• Standard red for A/B shorts
3. ENTRY PRICE (Premium style only)
→ Shows exact entry price at signal generation
4. TOOLTIP (all styles)
→ Hover over signal to see complete trade plan
→ Includes: Entry, Stop, TP1, TP2, Risk, R:R ratios, market conditions, signal reason, confluence score
INTERPRETING GRADES:
→ A+ SIGNALS (Highest Quality)
• 8-12+ confirming factors aligned
• Multiple divergences OR strong momentum reversal
• HTF alignment + volume + session timing + clear structure
• These are your highest-probability setups
• Recommended action: Give these priority, consider larger position size
→ A SIGNALS (High Quality)
• 5-9+ confirming factors aligned
• Good confluence, most key factors present
• Missing 1-2 optimal conditions
• These are still quality trades
• Recommended action: Standard position size, solid setups
→ B SIGNALS (Moderate Quality)
• 3-7+ confirming factors aligned
• Minimum viable confluence
• May be missing HTF alignment, volume, or session timing
• Higher variance outcomes
• Recommended action: Smaller position size or skip if conservative
SIGNAL NARRATIVE:
Each signal tooltip includes a narrative explaining WHY it was generated:
→ "Multi-divergence at oversold extreme"
• Multiple oscillators showing bullish divergence
• Kinetic Pulse in oversold zone
• High-quality reversal setup
→ "Bullish divergence near support"
• Divergence detected
• Price near key support level (swing low or PDL)
• Structure confluence
→ "Momentum reversal with HTF alignment"
• Kinetic Pulse velocity reversing
• Higher timeframe supports direction
• Strong trend-following setup
→ "Oversold momentum reversal"
• Extreme Kinetic Pulse reading reversing
• May not have divergence but strong momentum shift
READING THE TRADE PLAN:
Every signal comes with a complete trade plan:
→ ENTRY: The close price of the signal candle
• This is where the signal triggered
• If using limit orders, you might improve on this price
→ STOP: Calculated stop loss level
• Based on your Stop Loss Method setting
• Distance shown in ticks
• Risk tolerance: Ensure this represents ≤1-2% of your account
→ TP1: First profit target
• Default: 1:1 risk-reward
• This is your partial profit or first exit
• Consider taking 50% off at TP1
→ TP2: Second profit target
• Default: 1:2 risk-reward
• This is your "full win" target
• Hold remaining position for this level
SIGNAL FREQUENCY EXPECTATIONS:
Frequency varies by timeframe, sensitivity, and market conditions:
→ AGGRESSIVE MODE
• Lower timeframes (1m-5m): 5-15 signals per day
• Mid timeframes (15m-1H): 2-5 signals per day
• Higher timeframes (4H-D): 1-3 signals per week
→ BALANCED MODE (Default)
• Lower timeframes: 3-8 signals per day
• Mid timeframes: 1-3 signals per day
• Higher timeframes: 2-5 signals per week
→ CONSERVATIVE MODE
• Lower timeframes: 1-4 signals per day
• Mid timeframes: 0-2 signals per day
• Higher timeframes: 1-3 signals per week
Note: Frequency also depends on market volatility and trending vs. ranging conditions.
Example - Kinetic Scalper Trade Sequence
Here's an example showing the complete trade lifecycle with all dashboard transitions, annotations, and descriptions.
INSTRUMENT & TIMEFRAME DETAILS
Symbol: Nifty 50 Index (NSE)
Date: December 15, 2025
Session: London session (active trading hours)
Instrument Type: Index (auto-detected)
TRADE SEQUENCE BREAKDOWN
SCREENSHOT 1: Pre-Signal Setup Building (Image 1)
Time: ~12:00-14:30 UTC+5:30(approx.)
Price Action: Uptrend showing signs of exhaustion near 26,200
Market State: Price at session highs
Main Dashboard (Top Right):
- Bias: LEAN SHORT
- Pulse: 58.9 (approaching overbought)
- Volatility: NORMAL
- Trend: TRANSITIONING
- Session: LONDON (favorable timing)
- Volume: 0.98x (slightly below average)
- HTF: BULLISH (caution for counter-trend)
- Best Score: 9/5 (Short score building)
- PDH/PDL: 26098.25 / 25938.95
Trade Analysis Panel (Bottom Left):
- Status: NO ACTIVE TRADE
- Long Score: 5/5 (RDY)
- Short Score: 9/5 (RDY)
- Panel Message: "Short pattern developing - score: 9"
Description :
Setup Development Phase: The indicator identifies a potential short opportunity as price reaches the previous day's high. The short confluence score has climbed to 9/15 points, meeting the 'Balanced' sensitivity threshold for a Grade B signal. Notice the 'LEAN SHORT' bias and the Kinetic Pulse reading of 58.9 approaching overbought territory. The Trade Analysis panel shows 'Short pattern developing' with 9/5 factors aligned. Key factors: momentum approaching reversal zone, price at resistance (PDH), and London session providing favorable conditions.
SCREENSHOT 2: Signal Generated & Trade Entered (Image 2)
Time: ~13:00 UTC+5:30 (signal bar)
Entry Price: 26,184.65
Signal Grade: Grade
Main Dashboard (Top Right):
- Trade: SHORT
- Entry: 26184.65
- P/L: 5.95 pts | +0.2R (early positive movement)
- TP1: 26157.00 (33.2 pts away)
- TP2: 26129.35 (60.84 pts away)
- Stop: 26212.30 (22.1 pts away)
- Bars: 1 (just entered)
Trade Analysis Panel (Bottom Left):
- Header: TRADE ANALYSIS
- Status Bar: "Conditions mixed - improving 57%"
- Confidence: 57% RISING
- Factor Breakdown:
- Momentum: -4 (velocity not yet aligned)
- Position: +4 (slight profit)
- Volume: +2 = (volume present)
- HTF Align: +2 = (not strongly aligned)
- Target: +0 - (far from TP)
- Stop Dist: +3 - (good distance)
- Bottom Status: "Conditions mixed - Monitoring"
- Disclaimer: "Analysis only - Not financial advice"
Description:
Signal Activation: A Grade A short signal triggers at 26,184.65 after the short confluence score reached qualifying levels. The indicator places a structure-based stop loss at 26,212.30 (27.65 points risk) with dual targets at 1:1 and 1:2 risk-reward ratios.
The Trade Analysis Panel immediately begins monitoring with an initial confidence score of 57% - classified as 'MIXED SIGNALS' but showing a 'RISING' trend. Factor analysis reveals: momentum not yet aligned (-4 points as price just reversed), position slightly favorable (+4 points already +0.2R), volume adequate (+2), HTF showing weak alignment (+2 as we're counter-trend), stop well-placed (+3), but targets still distant (0 points).
Notice how the Main Dashboard switches from market scanning mode to active trade tracking, now displaying entry price, live P/L in both points (5.95 pts) and R-multiples (+0.2R), and distances to all key levels. The analysis panel provides real-time factor scoring to help monitor trade health.
SCREENSHOT 3: TP1 Hit - Trade Performing Well (Image 3)
Time: ~14:20 UTC+5:30(approx)
Price: ~26,154 (TP1 zone)
Bars in Trade: 29
Main Dashboard (Top Right):
- Trade: SHORT
- Entry: 26184.65
- P/L: 30.85 pts | +1.12R (excellent progress)
- TP1: HIT (displayed in green)
- TP2: 26129.35 (24.44 pts away)
- Stop: 26212.30 (58.5 pts away - well protected)
- Bars: 29
Trade Analysis Panel (Bottom Left):
- Header: TRADE ANALYSIS
- Status Bar: "Multiple factors positive"
- Confidence: 78% RISING
- Factor Breakdown:
- Momentum: +8 = (ALIGNED)
- Position: +8 + (strong profit zone)
- Volume: +2 + (continued support)
- HTF Align: +8 = (now strongly aligned)
- Target: +10 + (TP1 achieved, approaching TP2)
- Stop Dist: +3 + (excellent cushion)
- Bottom Status: "Multiple factors positive"
- Visual State: Green background (FACTORS ALIGNED state)
Description:
Trade Execution Phase - First Target Achieved: After 29 bars , price reaches the first take-profit target at 26,157.00. The ' ' marker confirms partial profit taking. Current P/L shows +30.85 points (+1.12R), exceeding the initial 1:1 risk-reward.
The Trade Analysis Panel shows dramatic improvement - confidence has surged to 78% (FACTORS ALIGNED state) with most factors now positive:
- Momentum factor improved to +8 (velocity aligned with trade direction)
- Position factor at +8 (over +1R profit zone)
- HTF Align jumped to +8 (higher timeframe now confirming the move)
- Target factor maxed at +10 (TP1 achieved, TP2 within reach)
- Stop Distance at +3 (58.5 points cushion providing safety)
Notice the panel status displays 'Multiple factors positive' with a green-tinted background, indicating optimal trade conditions. The confidence trend shows 'RISING' suggesting continued momentum. With TP1 secured and only 24.44 points to TP2, the trade is well-positioned for a full 1:2R win.
SCREENSHOT 4: TP2 Reached - Trade Complete (Image 4)
Time: ~15:00+ UTC+5:30
Final Exit: 26,129.35 (TP2)
Final Result: Full TP2 win
Main Dashboard (Top Right):
- Bias: NEUTRAL (reverted to scanning mode)
- Pulse: 45.2 (returned to neutral zone)
- Volatility: NORMAL
- Trend: TREND DOWN (confirmed the move)
- Session: LONDON
- Volume: 1.26x (increased as move developed)
- HTF: BEARISH (fully aligned post-trade)
- Best Score: 5/5 (neutral after completion)
Trade Analysis Panel (Bottom Left):
- Status: NO ACTIVE TRADE (reverted)
- Long Score: 5/5 (RDY)
- Short Score: 5/5 (RDY)
- Panel Message: "Scanning - prime session active"
- Light blue/cyan background (back to scanning mode)
Description:
Trade Completion - Full Target Achieved: The short trade reaches its second take-profit target at 26,129.35, securing a complete 1:2 risk-reward win. The ' ' marker confirms the exit. Final results:
- Entry: 26,184.65
- Exit: 26,129.35
- Profit: 55.30 points (approximately +2.0R)
- Outcome: Full TP2 success
Post-Trade Analysis: After trade closure, the indicator automatically returns to market scanning mode. The Main Dashboard reverts to showing market conditions rather than trade metrics. Notice how the 'Trend' now displays 'TREND DOWN' - confirming the move we captured. Volume increased to 1.26x during the winning move, validating the signal quality.
The Trade Analysis Panel switches back to 'NO ACTIVE TRADE' status and resumes displaying long/short setup scores. The confidence-based factor monitoring was instrumental throughout the trade:
- Initial entry at 57% confidence (MIXED SIGNALS)
- Peak confidence of 78% at TP1 (FACTORS ALIGNED)
- Real-time factor updates helped confirm trade validity
This example demonstrates the indicator's complete workflow: setup identification → signal generation → entry execution → live trade monitoring → systematic exit at targets.
KEY FEATURES DEMONSTRATED
1. Dual Dashboard System
- Main Dashboard: Market conditions (scanning) → Trade metrics (active position)
- Analysis Panel: Setup scores (scanning) → Factor-based confidence (in-trade)
2. Visual Trade Management
- Color-coded entry zones (yellow)
- Risk levels clearly marked (red dashed stop)
- Profit targets with R:R ratios labeled
- Achievement markers ( , )
3. Real-Time Factor Analysis
- 6-factor scoring system (Momentum, Position, Volume, HTF, Target, Stop Dist)
- Confidence percentage with trend indicators
- State machine (MIXED → FACTORS ALIGNED)
- Hysteresis prevents false state changes
4. Risk Management
- Structure-based stop placement (respects swing highs)
- Multiple take-profit levels (1:1 and 1:2 R:R)
- Live P/L tracking in points and R-multiples
- Distance monitoring to all key levels
This complete example showcases the indicator's progression from setup identification through trade completion, demonstrating how the dual-dashboard system and factor-based analysis provide continuous trade guidance. The structured stop-loss and dual-target approach delivered the planned 1:2 risk-reward ratio with systematic, rule-based execution.
ALERT SYSTEM
The indicator includes 9 built-in alert conditions:
SIGNAL ALERTS:
→ High-Grade Long Signal (A+)
• Triggers only on A+ long signals
• For traders who want only the highest-quality longs
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: LONG @ "
→ High-Grade Short Signal (A+)
• Triggers only on A+ short signals
• For traders who want only the highest-quality shorts
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: SHORT @ "
→ Long Signal
• Triggers on ANY qualified long signal (A+, A, or B)
• For traders who want all long opportunities
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: LONG @ "
→ Short Signal
• Triggers on ANY qualified short signal
• For traders who want all short opportunities
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: SHORT @ "
TRADE MANAGEMENT ALERTS:
→ TP1 Hit
• Triggers when first profit target is reached
• Useful for partial profit taking notifications
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: TP1 REACHED"
→ TP2 Reached
• Triggers when second profit target is reached
• Trade is complete, full win achieved
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: TP2 REACHED"
→ Stop Loss Hit
• Triggers when stop loss is reached
• Important for trade management and risk tracking
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: STOP LOSS"
ANALYSIS STATE ALERTS:
→ Analysis State: Negative Bias
• Triggers when factor analysis enters "Negative Bias" state
• Warning that trade conditions are deteriorating
• Consider reducing position or preparing to exit
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: Analysis state changed to NEGATIVE BIAS"
→ Analysis State: Factors Weakening
• Triggers when factor analysis enters "Factors Weakening" state
• Caution that confluence is diminishing
• Monitor trade closely
• Message: "KINETIC SCALPER: Analysis state changed to FACTORS WEAKENING"
HOW TO SET UP ALERTS:
1. Click the "Create Alert" button in TradingView
2. Condition: Select "Kinetic Scalper "
3. Choose your desired alert from the dropdown
4. Configure your alert options:
→ Once Per Bar Close (recommended for non-repainting)
→ Frequency: Once Per Bar Close or Only Once
5. Set expiration and notification methods (popup, email, webhook, etc.)
6. Create alert
RECOMMENDED ALERT STRATEGY:
For active traders:
→ Set "Long Signal" and "Short Signal" alerts for all opportunities
→ Set "TP1 Hit", "TP2 Reached", and "Stop Loss Hit" for trade management
→ Consider "Analysis State: Negative Bias" for trade monitoring
For selective traders:
→ Set only "High-Grade Long Signal (A+)" and "High-Grade Short Signal (A+)"
→ Focus on the absolute highest-quality setups
→ Set TP/SL alerts for position management
USAGE TIPS & BEST PRACTICES
SIGNAL SELECTION:
✓ GRADE MATTERS
→ A+ signals have statistically more confluence factors
→ If you're conservative, trade only A+ signals
→ B signals can work but require more discretion
✓ CONFLUENCE WITH YOUR ANALYSIS
→ Use this indicator as CONFIRMATION, not sole decision criteria
→ Combine with your own support/resistance analysis
→ Check for fundamental events (news, economic data)
→ Respect major round numbers and psychological levels
✓ SESSION TIMING (Forex)
→ Best signals often occur during London/NY overlap
→ Avoid signals 10 minutes before major news releases
→ Asian session signals can be valid but lower liquidity
✓ TIMEFRAME CONFLUENCE
→ If you get an A+ signal on 15m, check if 1H chart agrees
→ Higher timeframe confirmation adds conviction
→ Avoid signals that oppose the daily/4H trend
TRADE MANAGEMENT:
✓ POSITION SIZING
→ ALWAYS size positions so stop loss = 1-2% of account
→ Never risk more than you can afford to lose
→ Smaller position on B signals, standard on A, larger on A+ (within limits)
✓ PARTIAL PROFIT TAKING
→ Consider taking 50% off at TP1
→ Move stop to breakeven after TP1 hit
→ Let remaining position run to TP2
✓ TRAILING STOPS
→ The indicator doesn't auto-trail stops (manual decision)
→ After TP1, you might manually move stop to entry (breakeven)
→ Consider ATR-based trailing stop for runners
✓ WATCH THE ANALYSIS PANEL
→ If state changes to "Factors Weakening" while in profit, consider exit
→ "Negative Bias" during a trade is a strong warning
→ "Factors Aligned" confirms your trade thesis is still valid
RISK MANAGEMENT:
✓ NEVER IGNORE STOPS
→ The calculated stop is there for a reason
→ Moving stop further away increases risk exponentially
→ If stopped out, accept it and wait for next setup
✓ AVOID REVENGE TRADING
→ If you get stopped out, resist urge to immediately re-enter
→ Signal cooldown helps with this
→ Wait for next qualified signal
✓ RESPECT VOLATILITY WARNINGS
→ If indicator shows "EXTREME" volatility, signals are blocked for a reason
→ Don't force trades in chaotic conditions
→ Wait for regime to normalize
✓ CORRELATION RISK
→ Be aware of correlation if trading multiple pairs
→ EUR/USD and GBP/USD are highly correlated
→ Don't stack risk on correlated instruments
OPTIMIZATION:
✓ START WITH DEFAULTS
→ Default settings are well-tested
→ Don't over-optimize for recent market behavior
→ Give settings at least 20-30 trades before judging
✓ TIMEFRAME-SPECIFIC ADJUSTMENTS
→ Lower timeframes: Consider increasing Signal Distance to 3.0-4.0
→ Higher timeframes: ATR Stop Multiplier might go to 2.0-2.5
→ Crypto: Ensure Instrument Type is set to "Crypto" for proper stops
✓ SENSITIVITY CALIBRATION
→ Too many signals? Switch to Conservative
→ Missing good setups? Try Balanced or Aggressive
→ Quality > Quantity always
✓ KEEP A JOURNAL
→ Track which signal grades work best for you
→ Note which sessions produce best results
→ Review stopped trades for patterns
THINGS TO AVOID:
✗ DON'T chase signals after several bars have passed
✗ DON'T ignore the stop loss or move it further away
✗ DON'T overtrade by taking every B-grade signal
✗ DON'T trade during major news if you're not experienced
✗ DON'T use this as your only analysis tool
✗ DON'T expect 100% win rate (no indicator has this)
✗ DON'T risk more than 1-2% per trade regardless of signal grade
UNDERSTANDING THE METHODOLOGY
WHY VOLUME WEIGHTING?
Traditional momentum oscillators treat all price moves equally. A 10-point move on low volume is weighted the same as a 10-point move on high volume.
The Kinetic Pulse corrects this by:
→ Calculating volume ratio vs. 20-bar average
→ Applying square root transformation to volume ratio (prevents extreme weights)
→ Multiplying price changes by volume weight
→ Result: High-volume moves influence the oscillator more than low-volume noise
This helps filter false breakouts and emphasizes moves with participation.
WHY FISHER TRANSFORM?
Fisher Transform is a mathematical transformation that:
→ Normalizes probability distributions
→ Creates sharper turning points
→ Amplifies extremes while compressing the middle
→ Makes overbought/oversold levels more distinct
Applied to the Kinetic Pulse, it helps identify genuine extremes vs. noise.
WHY MULTI-OSCILLATOR DIVERGENCE?
Single-source divergence can give false signals. By requiring divergence confirmation across multiple oscillators (Kinetic Pulse, CCI, Stochastic), the system filters out:
→ Divergences caused by calculation quirks in one oscillator
→ Temporary momentum anomalies
→ False divergence on noisy, low-timeframe charts
Multiple sources confirming the same pattern increases reliability.
WHY ADAPTIVE PERIODS?
Fixed periods can be:
→ Too slow during high volatility (miss fast reversals)
→ Too fast during low volatility (generate noise)
The adaptive system:
→ Shortens period when ATR ratio > 1.3 (high volatility = need faster response)
→ Lengthens period when ATR ratio < 0.7 (low volatility = need noise filtering)
→ Keeps period in reasonable range (60% to 140% of base period)
→ Result: Oscillator adjusts to current market pace automatically
WHY HYSTERESIS IN STATE MACHINE?
Without hysteresis, the analysis state would flip-flop on every bar, creating:
→ Confusing, contradictory guidance
→ Analysis paralysis
→ Lack of actionable information
Hysteresis solves this by:
→ Using different thresholds to ENTER vs. EXIT a state
→ Example: Enter "Factors Aligned" at 72+ confidence, but don't exit until <62
→ This creates stable states that persist through minor fluctuations
→ Requires minimum commitment period (3 bars) before state changes
→ Overrides commitment for significant events (near TP/SL)
→ Result: Stable, trustworthy analysis that changes only when truly warranted
WHY CONFIDENCE SMOOTHING?
Raw factor scores fluctuate bar-by-bar based on momentary conditions. Smoothing:
→ Uses 5-period EMA on raw confidence scores
→ Filters out single-bar anomalies
→ Preserves genuine trends in confidence
→ Prevents false state transitions
→ Result: More reliable assessment of actual trade health
WHY INSTRUMENT-SPECIFIC PARAMETERS?
Different instruments have different characteristics:
→ Forex is highly liquid, respects technical levels well, standard ATR works
→ Crypto is extremely volatile, needs wider stops (1.8x) to avoid false stops
→ Indices respect session opens strongly, session weighting is important
→ Commodities fall in between
Auto-detection applies research-based multipliers automatically.
WHY STRUCTURE-BASED STOPS?
ATR-based stops can:
→ Place stop in middle of consolidation (easily hit)
→ Ignore obvious invalidation levels
→ Be too tight during expansion or too wide during contraction
Structure-based stops:
→ Use actual swing highs/lows (where traders actually place stops)
→ Add small ATR buffer to avoid stop hunting
→ Constrain within min/max ATR limits for safety
→ Result: Stops that respect market geometry while managing risk
DISCLAIMER & RISK WARNING
READ THIS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS INDICATOR
This indicator is provided for EDUCATIONAL and INFORMATIONAL purposes only.
❌ NOT FINANCIAL ADVICE
This indicator does NOT constitute financial advice, investment recommendations, or solicitation to buy or sell any financial instrument. All information is for educational purposes only.
❌ NO GUARANTEES
→ Past performance does NOT guarantee future results
→ No indicator can predict future price movements with certainty
→ Signal grades represent confluence, NOT win probability
→ A+ signals can lose, B signals can win - markets are probabilistic
❌ SUBSTANTIAL RISK
Trading financial instruments involves SUBSTANTIAL RISK of loss:
→ You can lose your entire investment
→ Leveraged trading amplifies both gains AND losses
→ Never trade with money you cannot afford to lose
→ Never risk more than 1-2% of your account per trade
❌ YOUR RESPONSIBILITY
→ All trading decisions are YOUR responsibility
→ You must conduct your own analysis before entering trades
→ Consult a licensed financial advisor before trading
→ Understand the risks specific to your jurisdiction and situation
→ Only trade with capital you can afford to lose completely
❌ NO HOLY GRAIL
→ This indicator is a TOOL, not a complete trading system
→ It should be used as part of a broader analysis framework
→ Combine with your own technical analysis, risk management, and judgment
→ No indicator works 100% of the time in all market conditions
❌ ANALYSIS PANEL DISCLAIMER
The "Trade Analysis Panel" provides ALGORITHMIC ANALYSIS of market factors.
→ It does NOT provide investment advice or recommendations
→ Factor scores are mathematical calculations, not predictions
→ Guidance messages are informational, not directives
→ All trading decisions remain your responsibility
❌ BACKTESTING LIMITATIONS
→ This is an indicator, not a strategy, so no backtesting results are provided
→ Any backtesting you perform includes hindsight bias and optimization bias
→ Historical performance does not indicate future performance
→ Slippage, commissions, and real-world execution differ from backtests
❌ MARKET CONDITIONS
→ This indicator performs differently in trending vs. ranging markets
→ Extreme volatility can produce false signals or whipsaws
→ Low liquidity periods increase execution risk
→ Major news events can invalidate technical analysis
BY USING THIS INDICATOR, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE:
→ You have read and understood this disclaimer
→ You accept full responsibility for your trading decisions
→ You understand the substantial risks involved in trading
→ You will not hold the author liable for any losses incurred
→ You are using this tool as part of your own due diligence process
KEY FEATURES SUMMARY
✅ Volume-Weighted Kinetic Pulse Engine (proprietary momentum calculation)
✅ 15-Factor Confluence Scoring System (graded signals: A+, A, B)
✅ Multi-Oscillator Divergence Detection (Pulse + CCI + Stochastic)
✅ Higher Timeframe Trend Alignment Filter
✅ Adaptive Period Adjustment (volatility-responsive)
✅ Instrument-Aware Calibration (Forex, Crypto, Indices, Commodities)
✅ Structure-Based Stop Loss Calculation (respects swing highs/lows)
✅ Automated Trade Tracking (entry, stop, TP1, TP2, P/L)
✅ Real-Time Factor Analysis State Machine (5-state system with hysteresis)
✅ Session Awareness (Asian, London, New York, Overlap)
✅ Volatility Regime Detection (blocks signals in extreme conditions)
✅ Choppiness Filter (reduces signals in ranging markets)
✅ Volume Confirmation (relative volume and delta analysis)
✅ Clean Air Check (validates clear path to targets)
✅ Comprehensive Dashboards (market conditions + trade analysis)
✅ Customizable Display (3 signal styles, color themes, positioning)
✅ 9 Built-In Alert Conditions (signals, TP/SL hits, state changes)
✅ Fully Non-Repainting (barstate.isconfirmed, lookahead_off)
✅ Previous Day Levels (PDH/PDL reference lines)
✅ Mobile-Friendly Compact Mode (for smaller screens)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
→ Pine Script Version: v6
→ Indicator Type: Overlay (displays on price chart)
→ License: Mozilla Public License 2.0
→ Copyright: BULLBYTE
→ Object Limits: 300 labels, 100 lines, 50 boxes
→ Memory Management: Automatic cleanup system (FIFO queue)
→ Repainting: Non-repainting (signals confirmed on bar close)
→ Timeframe Support: All timeframes (1s to Monthly)
→ Instrument Support: Forex, Crypto, Indices, Commodities, Stocks
→ HTF Data Handling: lookahead_off with historical offset
VERSION HISTORY
v1.0 - Initial Release
→ Kinetic Pulse engine with volume weighting and Fisher Transform
→ 15-factor confluence scoring system
→ Trade analysis state machine with hysteresis
→ Automated trade tracking and monitoring
→ Dual dashboard system (market conditions + factor analysis)
→ 9 alert conditions
→ 3 signal display styles
→ Instrument-aware calibration
→ Full risk management framework
WHO IS THIS INDICATOR FOR?
IDEAL FOR:
✓ Scalpers and day traders seeking high-confluence reversal entries
✓ Swing traders who want quality over quantity
✓ Traders who appreciate systematic, rules-based analysis
✓ Multi-timeframe traders who value HTF confirmation
✓ Forex traders who respect session timing
✓ Crypto traders needing volatility-adjusted parameters
✓ Traders who want complete trade management (entry, stop, targets)
✓ Analytical traders who want transparency in signal generation
NOT IDEAL FOR:
✗ Traders seeking a "set and forget" holy grail system
✗ Traders who don't want to learn the methodology
✗ Traders unwilling to accept losing trades as part of the process
✗ Traders who need constant signals (this is a quality-focused system)
✗ Traders who ignore risk management
FINAL THOUGHTS
The Kinetic Scalper is the result of extensive research into momentum behavior, volume confirmation, and multi-factor confluence analysis. It's designed to identify high-probability reversal setups while maintaining strict risk management and providing complete transparency.
This is NOT a magic solution. It's a sophisticated TOOL that requires:
→ Understanding of the methodology
→ Proper risk management discipline
→ Patience to wait for quality setups
→ Willingness to accept losses as part of trading
→ Integration with your own analysis and judgment
Used properly as part of a complete trading plan, the Kinetic Scalper can help you identify high-confluence opportunities and manage trades systematically.
Remember: Quality over quantity. Discipline over emotion. Risk management over everything.
Trade smart. Trade safe.
© 2025 BULLBYTE | Kinetic Scalper v1.0 | For Educational Purposes Only
In-Range Rolling SL
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and trade entry opportunities based on rolling price windows.
Core Concept
The indicator analyzes the highest high and lowest low over a defined lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish an "in-range" zone. When price stays within this range without breaking either boundary, it creates a squeeze condition—signaling potential breakout opportunities.
Trading Strategy
Wait for the Squeeze Setup
The most effective approach is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. This occurs when both the long SL (green line) and short SL (red line) are active simultaneously, indicated by the yellow status dot (🟡) in the indicator table. Analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL while price remains compressed—this setup identifies which side is more likely to break first.
Entry Timing and Risk Management
Long Entry: Enter when a candle closes above the in-range short SL (red line) without any wick above it. This "perfect breakout candle" confirms bullish momentum. Your entry should be around the region, with your stop-loss placed just below the top of the breakout candle's high.
Short Entry: Enter when a candle closes below the in-range long SL (green line). The stop-loss for short trades should be set 34.26 points above your entry for appropriate risk protection.
Risk-Reward Considerations
If you enter at the low of a breakout candle, expect only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. However, if you accidentally go long and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss.
Advanced Techniques
Failed Breakout Trap: If a follow-up candle doesn't make a higher high after the initial breakout, consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding for a trap. When your buy-stop sits on top of the breakout candle high, this isn't a valid long trade setup.
Flip Trade Opportunity: In-range stop-loss attempts to flip often provide ideal entry points. If the up candle doesn't break the previous low, this validates the long continuation.
Long Scalp Trading: A failed long scalp can be traded if you missed the initial market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit exceeding 50 points, this provides favorable risk-reward ratios.
Sustained Loss Management: Stop-loss for long positions should target 26 points maximum loss. The indicator automatically invalidates stop-losses when price violates them, keeping your chart clean for the next setup.
-------------------------
In-Range Rolling SL Indicator Guide
The In-Range Rolling SL indicator is a dynamic stop-loss system designed for intraday trading that identifies squeeze conditions and breakout opportunities based on rolling price windows.
How the Indicator Works
The indicator tracks the highest high and lowest low over your selected lookback period (default: 2 candles) to establish dynamic support and resistance levels. These levels create an "in-range" zone that adapts as new price action develops.
Visual Components
Green Line (Long SL): The rolling window's lowest low - your stop-loss level for long positions
Red Line (Short SL): The rolling window's highest high - your stop-loss level for short positions
Status Indicators:
🟡 Yellow: Squeeze condition (both SLs active)
🟢 Green: Long-only setup
🔴 Red: Short-only setup
⚪ White: Neutral (no active SLs)
The Squeeze Setup Strategy
Step 1: Wait for the Squeeze
The most effective way to use the In-Range Rolling SL is to wait for the in-range stop-loss squeeze to form. During the squeeze, both the green and red lines are active, meaning price has stayed within the rolling window without breaking either boundary. This compression phase indicates that it's "go time" to prepare your trade.
While in the squeeze, analyze the wick high/close relationship against the in-range SL levels. This analysis helps you determine which side is more likely to split when the breakout occurs.
Step 2: Identify the Perfect Breakout
Long Breakout: A perfect breakout candle should close above the in-range stop-loss high (red line) without any wick above it. This clean breakout demonstrates strong momentum and reduces the risk of a false breakout.
Short Breakout: Look for a candle that closes below the in-range SL low (green line), indicating a short-side trade is coming up.
Step 3: Entry Execution
Long Entry: Your entry should be around the region of the breakout. Position your stop-loss just below the top of the breakout candle's high. This placement protects you from failed breakouts while giving the trade room to develop.
Short Entry: Enter as the candle closes below the in-range SL low. The stop-loss for short-side trades is typically 34.26 points of potential loss based on the indicator's measurements.
Risk-Reward Analysis
Entry at Breakout Low
If you enter here at the low of the breakout candle, you're looking at only 8.26 points of drawdown potential. This represents your best-case entry scenario.
Accidental Wrong-Side Entry
However, if you accidentally go long here and your stop gets hit, you'll experience the full in-range stop-loss distance as your loss. This emphasizes the importance of waiting for clear breakout confirmation.
Long Scalp Opportunity
A failed long scalp can be traded here if you missed the market open down-up-down trend. With a stop-loss of 34 points and potential profit greater than 50 points, this setup offers a favorable risk-reward ratio of approximately 1:1.5.
Advanced Trade Management
Failed Breakout Recognition
Follow-Up Candle Validation: If a follow-up candle did not make a higher high than the breakout candle, this could be a trap. Your buy-stop on top of the breakout candle high is not a valid long trade setup in this scenario. Consider adding a "winner" for compensation rather than holding through the potential reversal.
Flip Trade Opportunities
In-range stop-loss tries to flip to the other side often provide excellent entries. If the up candle did not break the previous low, this validates the long continuation and suggests the squeeze is resolving to the upside.
Sustained Position Management
Stop-Loss Guidelines: Stop-loss for long positions should be 26 points of maximum loss. The indicator table displays the delta (Δ) showing your real-time distance to the active stop-loss, helping you manage risk dynamically.
Entry Timing: Your entry should be around the region where the breakout confirms, rather than chasing price after a large move. In order to prepare your trade, position your stop-loss on top of the breakout candle's high for long trades.
Practical Example from the Chart
Looking at the MNQ1! chart, you can see multiple squeeze formations throughout the session. The most notable sequence shows:
An initial downtrend creating a squeeze setup
A perfect breakout candle closing above the red line without upper wick
The subsequent candle validating the move
Later, a failed breakout attempt that created a short opportunity
Multiple flip attempts that provided re-entry points for scalpers
The indicator's table in the top-right continuously updates with the current SL levels, gap size, candle size, and delta values - giving you all the information needed to assess each trade's risk-reward profile in real-time.
Inversion Fair Value Gap Model [PJ Trades]GENERAL OVERVIEW:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator is a complete rule-based system designed to identify trade setups using the Inversion Fair Value Gap strategy taught by PJ Trades. It automates the strategy’s workflow by detecting liquidity sweeps, confirming V-shape recoveries, identifying valid Inversion Fair Value Gaps, validating higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap taps, and checking for a clear opposite Draw On Liquidity. These factors are evaluated together to produce a signal rating of A, A+, or A++, based on how many of these criteria the setup satisfies. When a long or short setup is confirmed, the indicator automatically plots an entry, stop-loss, break-even, and two take-profit levels.
A dashboard that updates in real-time displays the current directional bias, liquidity sweep activity, Inversion Fair Value Gap confirmation state, V Shape Recovery state, higher-timeframe Fair Value Gap context, opposite Draw on Liquidity, SMT divergence, and other key information relevant to the trading model. The indicator also includes optional trade statistics on the dashboard that tracks the recent win rates for A, A+, and A++ setups, as well as separate long and short win rates.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts, in collaboration with PJ Trades.
What is the theory behind the indicator?:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap model is built on the idea that when the market pushes above a high or below a low, it often does so to sweep liquidity. If that move quickly fails and price reverses, it shows the sweep was a grab for orders and not a continuation. That quick rejection is the V Shape Recovery behavior. An Inversion Fair Value Gap forms when a Fair Value Gap that once supported the original move gets invalidated afterward. That invalidation confirms the shift in direction and becomes the new reference point for trades. The Inversion Fair Value Gap model uses this sequence because it highlights when the market has taken liquidity, rejected continuation, and started delivering in the opposite direction.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAP MODEL FEATURES:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 15 main features:
Sessions
Key Levels & Swing Levels
Liquidity Levels
Liquidity Sweeps
V Shape Recoveries
Higher-Timeframe Fair Value Gaps
Inversion Fair Value Gaps
Macros
Bias
Signals
New Day Opening Gap
New Week Opening Gap
SMT Divergences
Dashboard
Alerts
SESSIONS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes five trading sessions (times in EST):
Asia: 20:00 - 00:00
London: 02:00 - 05:00
NY AM: 09:30 - 12:15
NY Lunch: 12:15 - 13:30
NY PM: 13:30 - 16:00
Session highs and lows are automatically tracked and used within the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Session Zones:
Each session has a zone that outlines its active time window. These zones can be toggled on or off independently. When active, they visually separate each part of the trading day. Users can adjust the color and opacity of each session box. Users can also enable session labels, which place a label above each session zone showing its corresponding session name.
🔹Session Time:
Users can toggle on ‘Time’ which will display each session’s time window next to its session title.
🔹Session Highs/Lows:
Every session can display its own high and low as horizontal lines. Users can customize the line style for session highs/lows, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted. The color of the lines will match the same color used for the session box. Users can adjust the color of the labels as well, which is applied to all session high/low labels.
When price has moved above a session high, or below a session low, the label will not be displayed anymore.
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each session’s high and low levels can be extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a session under the main Sessions section only hides its visuals (boxes, lines, or labels). It does not impact signal detection or logic.
KEY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator includes 11 key market levels that outline important structural price areas across daily, weekly, and monthly timeframes. These levels include the Daily Open, Previous Day High/Low, Weekly Open, Previous Week High/Low, Monthly Open, Previous Month High/Low, Midnight Open, and 08:30 Open. The levels can be enabled or disabled and customized in color and line style. All of the levels except the Midnight Open and 08:30 Open are used for the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹Daily Open
The Daily Open marks where the current trading day began.
🔹Previous Day High/Low
The Previous Day High (PDH) marks the highest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where buyers pushed price to its highest point before the market closed.
The Previous Day Low (PDL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where selling pressure reached its lowest point before buyers stepped in.
When price pushes above the PDH or below the PDL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Weekly Open
The Weekly Open marks the first price of the current trading week.
🔹Previous Week High/Low
The Previous Week High (PWH) marks the highest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where buying pressure reached its peak before the weekly close.
The Previous Week Low (PWL) marks the lowest price reached during the previous trading week. It shows where sellers pushed price to its lowest point before buyers regained control.
When price pushes above the PWH or below the PWL, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Monthly Open
The Monthly Open marks the opening price of the current month.
🔹Previous Month High/Low
The Previous Month High (PMH) marks the highest price reached during the previous calendar month. It represents the point at which buyers achieved the strongest push before the monthly close.
The Previous Month Low (PML) marks the lowest price reached during the previous calendar month. It shows where selling pressure was strongest before buyers stepped back in.
When price pushes above the PMH or below the PML, the level is removed from the chart.
🔹Midnight Open
The Midnight Open marks the first price of the trading day at 00:00 EST.
🔹08:30 Open
The 08:30 Open marks the opening price at 08:30 EST.
🔹Customization Options:
Users can fully customize the appearance of all key levels, including the following:
Labels
Label Size
Line Style
Line Colors
Labels:
Users can toggle on ‘Show Labels’ to display labels for each toggled-on level that price hasn’t pushed above/below. Users can also adjust the size of labels, choosing between auto, tiny, small, normal, large, or huge.
Line Style:
Users can select a line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted, which is applied to all toggled-on key levels.
Line Color:
Users can choose different colors for each of the following key levels:
Daily Open, Previous Day High, Previous Day Low
Weekly Open, Previous Week High, Previous Week Low,
Monthly Open, Previous Month High, Previous Month Low
Midnight Open
08:30 Open
🔹Extend Levels:
When enabled, each key level is extended forward by a set number of bars.
Please Note: Disabling a level in the “Key Levels” section only hides its visuals and does not affect the indicator’s signals.
🔹Swing Levels
The indicator automatically plots Swing Highs and Swing Lows which are used in the indicator’s signal generation logic.
A swing high forms when a candle’s high is greater than the highs of the bars immediately before and after it.
A swing low forms when a candle’s low is lower than the lows of the bars immediately before and after it.
🔹Swing Level Colors
Users can customize the color of Active Levels and Swept Levels.
Active Levels are levels that price has not pushed above or below
Swept Levels are levels that price pushed above or below.
🔹Swing Levels – Show Nearest
This setting determines how many swing highs/lows are displayed on the chart. The indicator will display the nearest X highs to price and the nearest X lows to price.
For example, if ‘Show Nearest’ is set to 2, the nearest 2 swing highs and nearest 2 swing lows to price will be plotted on the chart.
LIQUIDITY LEVELS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator automatically identifies and plots liquidity at key structural points in the market. These include swing highs and swing lows, session highs and lows, and major higher timeframe reference points as explained in the SESSIONS and KEY LEVELS sections above. All of these areas are treated as potential pools of resting orders and are used throughout the indicator’s signal logic.
🔹What is Buyside Liquidity?:
Buyside Liquidity (BSL) represents price levels where many buy stop orders are sitting, usually from traders holding short positions. When price moves into these areas, those stop-loss orders get triggered and short sellers are forced to buy back their positions. These zones often form above key highs such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding BSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the sudden wave of buy orders can create sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹What is Sellside Liquidity?:
Sellside Liquidity (SSL) represents price levels where many sell stop orders are waiting, usually from traders holding long positions. When price drops into these areas, those stop-loss orders are triggered and long traders are forced to sell their positions. These zones often form below key lows such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding SSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the surge of sell orders can cause sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹 Which Liquidity Levels Are Used
The indicator tracks liquidity at the following areas:
Asia Session High/Low
London High/Low
NY AM High/Low
NY Lunch High/Low
NY PM High/Low
Previous Day High and Low
Previous Week High and Low
Previous Month High and Low
Daily Open
Weekly Open
Monthly Open
Swing Highs/Lows
🔹 How Liquidity Levels Are Used
All tracked levels across sessions, swing points, and higher timeframes serve as potential liquidity targets. When price trades above one of these highs, the indicator looks for short setups if other confluences align. When price trades below lows, the indicator looks for long setups if other confluences align.
LIQUIDITY SWEEPS:
The indicator automatically detects Buyside Liquidity and Sellside Liquidity sweeps using the liquidity levels mentioned in the previous section.
🔹What is a Liquidity Sweep?
Liquidity sweeps occur when price trades beyond a key high or low and activates resting buy-stop or sell-stop orders in that area. It’s how the market gathers the liquidity needed for larger participants to enter positions.
Traders often place stop-loss orders around obvious highs and lows, such as the previous day’s, week’s, or month’s levels. When price pushes through one of these areas, it triggers the stops placed there and generates a burst of volume. This can lead to quick movements in price as those orders are executed.
🔹Sellside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips below a Sellside Liquidity (SSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by long traders below that low. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential long setups as the next step in the IFVG trading strategy. Long trades are only eligible after a SSL sweep.
🔹Buyside Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips above a Buyside Liquidity (BSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by short seller traders above that high. When this happens, the indicator records the sweep and begins monitoring for potential short setups as the next step in the trading strategy. Short trades are only eligible after a BSL sweep.
🔹How to Use Liquidity Sweeps
Liquidity sweeps are not direct trade signals. They are best used as context when forming a directional bias. A sweep shows that the market has removed liquidity from one side, which can hint at where the next move may develop.
For example:
When BSL is swept, it often signals that buy stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move lower. Traders may then begin looking for short opportunities.
When SSL is swept, it often signals that sell stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move higher. Traders may then begin looking for long opportunities.
V SHAPE RECOVERIES:
🔹 What Is a V Shape Recovery?
A V shape recovery is a sharp, immediate reversal that happens right after price sweeps BSL or SSL. It indicates that price quickly moved back in the opposite direction after trading through the level. This behavior signals a shift in momentum and is a required confirmation in the indicator for signal generation. The indicator will not look for long trades after a SSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. It will not look for short trades after a BSL sweep unless a V shape recovery occurs. Without this behavior, the indicator assumes that price may still be delivering in the direction of the sweep, so no valid setups can form.
🔹 Why V Shape Recoveries Matter
V shape recoveries help confirm that the liquidity the sweep did not immediately continue in the same direction. They separate false breaks from true continuation. A sweep without recovery often means price may keep trending, so the indicator does not generate signals in those cases. A sweep with a V shape recovery confirms rejection and sets the foundation for valid Inversion Fair Value Gap formation. This makes the V shape recovery one of the most important sequence steps in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model.
🔹 How the Indicator Detects V Shape Recoveries
V shape recoveries can be visually intuitive when looking at a chart, but they are difficult to define consistently programmatically. To ensure reliable and repeatable detection, the indicator uses a rules-based method that evaluates candle size, candle direction, and the strength of the move immediately following the liquidity sweep. This approach removes subjectivity and allows the indicator to confirm V shape behavior the same way every time.
The indicator does not plot any visual elements specifically for V shape recoveries. Instead, the presence of a V shape recovery is implied through the signals themselves. Every valid long or short signal that appears after a liquidity sweep requires a confirmed V shape recovery. This means that if a signal is generated following a sweep, a V shape recovery has occurred.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Sellside Sweep (SSL Sweep)
After price trades below a sellside liquidity level, long positions are liquidated. If buyers quickly step in and force price upward with strong momentum, this forms a V shape recovery. This signals that the sweep below the low was rejected and that buyers have reclaimed control. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for long setups.
🔹 V Shape Recovery After a Buyside Sweep (BSL Sweep)
After price pushes above a buyside liquidity level, many short positions are stopped out. If sellers immediately step in and drive price back down with strong movement, this forms a V shape recovery. This behavior reflects a quick change in candle direction immediately following the sweep. When this occurs, the indicator begins monitoring for short setups.
🔹Failed V Shape Recoveries
These examples show failed V shape recoveries, where price did not reverse decisively after the BSL or SSL sweep. The lack of strong response from buyers or sellers indicates that momentum did not shift. Thus, the indicator will not detect valid long/short setups using these liquidity sweeps.
HIGHER-TIMEFRAME FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Higher-timeframe Fair Value Gaps (HTF FVGs) provide important context in the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model because they show where significant imbalance occurred on larger market structures. The indicator automatically detects HTF FVGs and uses them as part of the signal rating system.
🔹 What Is a Fair Value Gap?
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is an area where the market’s perception of fair value suddenly changes. On your chart, it appears as a three-candle pattern: a large candle in the middle, with smaller candles on each side that don’t fully overlap it.
A bullish FVG forms when a bullish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
A bearish FVG forms when a bearish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
This creates an imbalance because price moved so quickly that one side of the auction did not trade.
Examples:
🔹 What Makes an FVG “Higher-Timeframe”?
In this indicator, HTF FVGs are Fair Value Gaps detected on timeframes higher than the chart’s current timeframe. For example, on a 5-minute chart, a 1-hour FVG would be considered a HTF FVG. The indicator automatically plots and checks whether price interacts with these HTF FVGs during a liquidity sweep and incorporates this into the signal rating (A, A+, A++).
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Higher-Timeframe FVGs
The indicator automatically scans up to three user-selected higher timeframes for valid bullish and bearish FVGs and tracks price’s behavior around them in the background. When any of these higher timeframes are enabled, their FVGs are used directly within the signal logic.
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
When an HTF FVG tap aligns with the direction of the setup, the signal’s rating is increased. This can increase a setup’s rating from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
🔹 Higher-Timeframe FVG Customization
Users can select up to three higher timeframes for HTF FVG detection. When a higher timeframe is enabled, its FVGs are used in the model’s signal logic. Users can also choose whether to display these HTF FVGs visually on the chart, by enabling the ‘Plot HTF FVGs’ setting.
Each enabled HTF FVG can be customized with the following options:
Bullish and Bearish Colors: Users can set different fill colors for bullish and bearish HTF FVGs for each selected timeframe.
Midline: When enabled, a midline is drawn through the center of each HTF FVG. Users can customize the midline’s line style, choosing between solid, dashed, or dotted and also customize the midline’s color.
Labels: When enabled, each plotted HTF FVG displays a label that shows its originating timeframe (for example, 1H, 4H).
Plot HTF FVGs: When disabled, the HTF FVG zones are hidden from the chart while the logic remains active in the background for signals.
Show Nearest:
This setting controls how many HTF FVGs are displayed based on proximity to current price. Users can choose to show the nearest X bullish HTF FVGs and the nearest X bearish HTF FVGs. This filter is applied across all enabled higher timeframes and does not limit by timeframe individually.
🔹When are Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gaps mitigated?
A Higher Timeframe Fair Value Gap is considered mitigated when a candle from the chart’s timeframe closes above the gap for a bearish FVG or below the gap for a bullish FVG.
INVERSION FAIR VALUE GAPS:
Inversion Fair Value Gaps (IFVGs) are a core requirement of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. Every long and short signal generated by the indicator requires a valid IFVG, just like liquidity sweeps and V shape recoveries. Without a confirmed IFVG, the model will not produce a setup.
🔹 What Is an Inversion Fair Value Gap?
An Inversion Fair Value Gap is a Fair Value Gap that becomes invalidated by a candle close in the opposite direction. This “flip” confirms that the original imbalance failed and that the market has shifted.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above it.
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below it.
In the indicator, IFVGs are not used as retracement areas. Signals are generated immediately when a valid IFVG forms, not after price returns to the gap. The IFVG itself is the confirmation event that finalizes a setup sequence after a liquidity sweep and V shape recovery.
🔹 How the Indicator Plots IFVGs
The indicator only plots IFVGs that are used in long or short setups. Not every possible IFVG is shown on the chart. Only the IFVG involved in a confirmed signal is displayed. Users can disable IFVG plots entirely if they prefer a minimal view. This hides the visual gaps but does not affect the signal logic.
🔹 Customization Options
Users can customize how IFVGs appear on the chart:
Color Settings: Choose separate fill colors for bullish IFVGs and bearish IFVGs.
Midline: Toggle an optional midline inside the IFVG and choose between a solid, dashed, or dotted line.
Midline Color: Adjust the color of the IFVG Midline.
MACROS:
Macros are short, predefined time windows, where price is more likely to seek liquidity or rebalance imbalances. These periods often create sharp movements or shifts in delivery, giving additional context to setups. In the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model, macros are used as a confluence factor. When a long or short signal forms during a macro time window, the setup’s rating can increase from A to A+ or from A+ to A++.
Macros are not required for a signal to form, but they increase the signal’s rating when the setup aligns with macro timing.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Macros
The indicator allows users to enable up to five macros. Each macro has its own start and end time, which the user can customize. These time windows are used directly in the signal logic. If a valid IFVG setup forms while price is inside any of the enabled macro windows, the indicator increases the signal’s rating.
Users may visually disable macros on the chart without affecting signal logic. Disabling visuals hides the macro zones, labels, and lines, but the underlying macro logic continues to function in the background for signals.
The indicator’s default macros use the following time periods (in EST):
09:50 - 10:10
10:50 - 11:10
11:50 - 12:10
12:50 - 13:10
13:50 - 14:10
🔹 Macro Settings
Each macro displays a shaded zone representing the active time window. This zone can be toggled on or off. Users can customize:
The color of each macro zone
The opacity of each zone
Whether the zones display at all (‘Show Zones’)
These visuals help identify whether price is currently inside a macro window.
🔹 Macro Labels:
Users can enable macro labels, which place a text label showing the macro’s title and its time window. The label color is global (applies to all macros), and the label size can be adjusted. Individual macros cannot have unique label colors.
🔹 Macro Start/End Lines
For additional clarity, the indicator draws two vertical markers for each macro:
One at the start of the macro
One at the end of the macro
A horizontal macro line is then drawn between the highs of these two candles to highlight the full duration of the macro window. Users can customize:
The line styles (solid, dashed, dotted) of the Macro Line and Start/End Lines
BIAS:
Bias determines which direction the indicator is allowed to generate signals. A bullish bias means only long setups can be confirmed. A bearish bias means only short setups can be confirmed. The bias acts as the final directional filter after a liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG have all been validated. Even if all model conditions are met, the indicator will only confirm the setup if the direction aligns with the active bias.
Users are able to manually set a bias or use an automatic bias filter, which is explained below.
🔹 Manual Bias
Users can manually choose the directional bias at any time and choose between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
When set to Bullish, the indicator will only confirm long setups, regardless of market structure.
When set to Bearish, only short setups are allowed.
When set to Both, the indicator can confirm both long and short setups if all requirements are met.
🔹 Automatic Bias
Automatic bias is fully rules-based and determined by how the previous session interacted with major draw-on-liquidity (DOL) levels. These levels include 1-hour highs and lows, 4-hour highs and lows, previous session highs and lows (such as Asia or London), and the previous day’s high and low. The indicator evaluates whether the previous session consolidated, manipulated liquidity, or manipulated and reversed before closing. Based on this behavior, the indicator establishes a directional bias for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Consolidation:
If the previous session did not sweep any major liquidity levels and price remained inside its range, the session is classified as consolidation.
After the current session sweeps a key low, the bias becomes bullish.
After the current session sweeps a key high, the bias becomes bearish.
The bias is determined live based on which side the current session manipulates first.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation (No Reversal):
If the previous session swept a major high-timeframe level but did not reverse before the session closed, the model assigns a reversal-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low, the current session bias is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high, the current session bias is bearish.
Here, bias is determined immediately because the previous session’s manipulation defines the directional framework for the current session.
◇ Previous Session Manipulation + Reversal:
If the previous session swept a DOL level and also reversed away from it within the same session, the model assigns a continuation-based bias at the start of the current session.
If the previous session swept a low and reversed upward, the bias for the current session is bullish.
If the previous session swept a high and reversed downward, the bias is bearish.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses Bias in Practice
After the indicator validates the liquidity sweep, V shape recovery, and IFVG, it checks the active bias before confirming a signal.
If bias is bullish, only long setups are allowed.
If bias is bearish, only short setups are allowed.
If bias is Both, setups of either direction may form.
The bias does not influence the detection of liquidity sweeps, V shape recoveries, or IFVGs. It only determines whether those validated components are allowed to produce a final signal. Automatic bias updates based on session behavior, while manual bias remains fixed until the user changes it.
SIGNALS:
Signals are the final output of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model indicator. A signal is only generated when all model conditions are satisfied in a clear, rules-based sequence.
A signal consists of:
An Entry
A Stop-Loss (SL)
A Breakeven (BE) level
Two Take-Profit levels (TP1 and TP2)
These components are plotted immediately once the final requirement (the IFVG confirmation) is met and the directional filter (bias) allows the setup.
Signals can be rated A, A+, or A++, based on whether certain confluences were present during the setup’s formation.
🔹 What All Signals Have in Common
Each signal type (A, A+, A++) requires the same four mandatory conditions. If any of these four are missing, the indicator will not print a signal.
◇ Required Component #1 – Valid Directional Bias
The bias determines whether the indicator can confirm a long or short setup.
Bullish bias → only long setups allowed
Bearish bias → only short setups allowed
Both → long or short setups allowed
Automatic bias → bias determined by session-based liquidity logic explained above
◇ Required Component #2 – Liquidity Sweep
The indicator must detect one of the following:
Sellside Liquidity Sweep (SSL Sweep) for potential long setups
Buyside Liquidity Sweep (BSL Sweep) for potential short setups
◇ Required Component #3 – V Shape Recovery
After a liquidity sweep, the indicator evaluates whether price produced a valid V shape recovery.
◇ Required Component #4 – Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
An IFVG must form in the direction of the potential setup.
A bullish IFVG forms when a bearish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing above that gap
A bearish IFVG forms when a bullish FVG is invalidated by a candle closing below that gap
The IFVG must occur after the V Shape Recovery and Liquidity Sweep. The IFVG confirmation is the final structural requirement. Once it forms, the setup is considered structurally complete.
🔹 A Signals
An A-rated signal contains exactly the four required components:
Valid Bias
Liquidity Sweep
V Shape Recovery
IFVG
An A signals represent the foundational implementation of the IFVG Model.
🔹 A+ Signals
An A+ signal includes the full A-signal structure plus ONE of the following:
Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
Multi-Liquidity Sweep
Inside a Macro Window
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Tap
During a liquidity sweep, the indicator checks whether price taps into any enabled HTF FVG. A tap occurs when price trades inside the boundaries of a higher-timeframe FVG during or immediately after the sweep.
A bullish HTF FVG tap during a sellside sweep supports a long setup.
A bearish HTF FVG tap during a buyside sweep supports a short setup.
◇ Multi-Liquidity Sweep
A Multi-Liquidity Sweep occurs when price sweeps two liquidity levels of the same type in the same directional push.
Sweeping two lows in one move: Multi-Sellside Liquidity Sweep (long setups).
Sweeping two highs in one move → Multi-Buyside Liquidity Sweep (short setups).
◇ Inside a Macro Window
The final IFVG confirmation must occur inside a macro time window defined by the user.
If exactly one of these additional confluences is present, the signal rating is A+.
🔹 A++ Signals (Two Additional Confluences)
An A++ signal contains the full A signal structure plus TWO of the three confluences listed above.
HTF FVG tap + Multi-Liquidity Sweep
HTF FVG tap + Inside a Macro Window
Multi-Liquidity Sweep + Inside a Macro Window
If two confluences are present, the rating becomes A++. If all three are present, the setup is still rated a A++ (there is no A+++).
🔹 Signal Plots
When a valid long/short setup is detected, a signal with its rating appears with the following:
Entry: At the close of the candle that inverted a FVG
Stop-Loss: At the nearest swing high for short setups or nearest swing low for long setups
Breakeven Level: At the nearest swing high for long setups or the nearest swing low for short setups
Take-Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high for long setups or the second nearest swing low for short setups.
Take-Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high for long setups or the third nearest swing low for short setups.
After a signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels for Entry, SL, BE, TP1, and TP2 are removed from the chart. If another signal appears before the prior signal reaches either TP2 or SL, the levels are also removed.
Users can hover over any signal label to view a short summary of the exact criteria that were met for that setup. This includes whether a HTF FVG tap occurred, whether a multi-liquidity sweep was detected, whether the setup formed inside a macro window, and which liquidity level was swept prior to the V shape recovery.
🔹 Long Setup – A Rating
A long A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. First, price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bullish IFVG must form by invalidating a bearish Fair Value Gap with a candle close above it.
For a confirmed long signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bearish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps a swing low, has a V Shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A Rating
A short A-rated setup forms when all four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur without any additional confluences. Price must first sweep a Buyside Liquidity level. Immediately after the sweep, price must form a valid V shape recovery. Once the recovery completes, a bearish IFVG must form by invalidating a bullish Fair Value Gap with a candle close below it.
For a confirmed short signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that invalidates the bullish FVG and creates the IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG:
🔹 Long Setup – A+ Rating
A long A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG by invalidating a bearish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bullish HTF FVG tap during the liquidity sweep, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps the NY AM Session Low, taps a 30-minute HTF FVG during the sweep, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bullish IFVG:
🔹 Short Setup – A+ Rating
A short A+ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and exactly one additional confluence is present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG by invalidating a bullish FVG. One of the following must also occur: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forms inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A+ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 13:50-14:10 macro:
🔹 Long Setup – A++ Rating
A long A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Sellside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bullish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bullish HTF FVG tap, a multi-sellside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed long A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bullish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing low
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing high
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing high
In this example, price sweeps two swing lows, has a V shape recovery, taps a bullish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bullish IFVG inside of the 10:50-11:10 macro:
🔹 Short Setup – A++ Rating
A short A++ setup forms when the four core requirements of the IFVG Model occur and at least two additional confluences are present. Price must sweep a Buyside Liquidity level, form a valid V shape recovery, and create a bearish IFVG. The setup must also include any two or three of the following: a bearish HTF FVG tap, a multi-buyside liquidity sweep, or the IFVG confirmation forming inside a macro window.
For a confirmed short A++ signal, the indicator marks:
Entry: At the candle close that creates the bearish IFVG
Stop Loss: At the nearest swing high
Breakeven: Midpoint between entry and stop-loss
Take Profit 1: At the second nearest swing low
Take Profit 2: At the third nearest swing low
In this example, price sweeps a swing high, has a V shape recovery, taps a bearish 30-minute HTF FVG during the liquidity sweep, and forms a bearish IFVG inside of the 09:50-10:10 macro:
🔹Signal Settings
◇ Liquidity Levels Used:
Users can select which type of liquidity levels the indicator uses for identifying liquidity sweeps:
Swing Points: Only uses Swing Highs/Lows
Session Highs/Lows: Only uses Session Highs/Lows
Both: Uses both Swing Highs/Lows and Session Highs/Lows
◇ Bias:
This setting determines which signal directions are allowed.
Manual Bias: Users can manually choose the directional bias, picking between Bullish, Bearish, or Both.
Automatic Bias: The indicator automatically determines a directional bias based on the criteria mentioned in the previous Bias section.
◇ IFVG Sensitivity:
This setting determines the minimum gap size required for an FVG to qualify as an Inversion FVG.
Higher values: only larger FVGs become IFVGs
Lower values: smaller gaps are allowed
◇ Use First Presented IFVG:
This setting determines whether the indicator limits signals to only the first IFVG created within the manipulation leg.
What Is the First Presented IFVG?
It is the earliest FVG formed inside the displacement that causes the liquidity sweep.
For a bearish manipulation leg (price moving downward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that downward move:
For a bullish manipulation leg (price moving upward into the sweep), the first presented IFVG is the first FVG created at the start of that upward move:
When this setting is enabled, the indicator will only confirm signals when the IFVG used is derived from this first presented FVG. IFVGs that form later in the manipulation leg are not used for signal generation.
◇ Only Take Trades:
This setting allows users to restrict signals to a defined time window.
If a complete setup occurs inside the time window, it is allowed and plotted
If it occurs outside the window, the signal will not appear
For example, if you only wanted to see long/short signals between 9:30 AM and 12:00 PM, you would enable this setting and set the time window from 09:30 - 12:00.
◇ Minimum R:R
This setting allows users to require a minimum risk-to-reward ratio before a signal is confirmed and plotted on the chart. The risk-to-reward ratio is calculated using the distance from the Entry to the Stop-Loss (risk) and the distance from the Entry to TP2 (reward). The indicator compares these distances and determines whether the setup meets or exceeds the minimum R:R value selected by the user.
If the calculated R:R is equal to or greater than the chosen threshold, the signal will be displayed.
If the calculated R:R is lower than the threshold, the signal will not appear on the chart.
🔹 Signal Rating Minimum
Users can restrict which signal ratings appear:
A: shows all signals
A+: shows only A+ and A++
A++: shows only A++ setups
🔹 Signal Styling and Customization
The indicator provides full control over how signal labels and levels appear on your chart. Users can customize long signals, short signals, all plotted lines, and the visibility of every individual element.
◇ Long Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Long Signal Label Color
Long Signal Text Color
Long Signal Label Size
◇ Short Signal Styling
Users can customize:
Short Signal Label Color
Short Signal Text Color
Short Signal Label Size
◇ Entry, Stop Loss, Breakeven, and Take Profit Lines
Each line type can be enabled or disabled individually:
Entry Line
Stop Loss Line
Breakeven Line
Take Profit 1 & 2 Lines
Users can also set custom colors for each line so every level is easy to track during live price movement.
◇ Show Price Labels
Price labels can be toggled on or off individually for each level. Users can choose whether to show or hide the price for:
Entry
Stop loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1 & 2
NEW DAY OPENING GAP:
The New Day Opening Gap (NDOG) highlights the price difference between the previous day’s closing candle and the first candle of the new trading day. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each day and makes it available as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Day Opening Gap?
A New Day Opening Gap forms when the trading day opens at a price different from the previous day’s final closing price.
If the new day opens above the prior day’s close → Bullish NDOG
If the new day opens below the prior day’s close → Bearish NDOG
This gap acts as a short-term draw on liquidity because the market may revisit the gap to rebalance price delivery. While the NDOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Day Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous day’s close to the new day’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next day’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NDOG replaces it the following day, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NDOG for signal generation. It is strictly a visual tool that helps traders identify areas where price may retrace or seek liquidity during the session.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Day Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Day Opening Gap: Toggle the NDOG zone on or off
Bullish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed above the prior close
Bearish NDOG Color: Customize the fill color for gaps formed below the prior close
NEW WEEK OPENING GAP:
The New Week Opening Gap (NWOG) highlights the price difference between the previous week’s final closing candle and the first candle of the new trading week. The indicator tracks this gap automatically each week and provides it as optional context for users.
🔹 What Is the New Week Opening Gap?
A New Week Opening Gap forms when the new trading week opens at a price different from the previous week’s closing price.
If the new week opens above the prior week’s close → Bullish NWOG
If the new week opens below the prior week’s close → Bearish NWOG
This gap often serves as a medium-term draw on liquidity because price may return to rebalance the weekly displacement. The NWOG is not a required component for IFVG signals.
🔹 How the Indicator Uses the New Week Opening Gap
When enabled, the indicator plots the gap as a rectangular zone spanning from the previous week’s close to the new week’s open. The zone remains active until it is fully filled by price or until the next week’s opening gap forms. Once price trades through the entire gap, or once a new NWOG replaces it the following week, the zone becomes inactive and is removed from the chart. The indicator does not use the NWOG for signal generation. It is purely a visual reference to help traders identify areas where price may rebalance or seek liquidity during the week.
🔹 Customization Options
Users have full control over how the New Week Opening Gap displays on the chart:
Show New Week Opening Gap: Toggle the NWOG zone on or off
Bullish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed above the prior weekly close
Bearish NWOG Color: Set the fill color for gaps formed below the prior weekly close
SMT DIVERGENCES:
The indicator automatically marks SMT Divergences that occur between the current selected chart ticker and a second user-selected ticker.
A SMT Divergence forms when the prices of the currently selected chart ticker and the user-selected ticker don’t follow each other. For example, if the current chart’s ticker symbol is SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and the user-selected ticker is $ES. If SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ does not sweep the low of the NY AM Session, but NYSE:ES sweeps that same exact session’s low during the same candle, then a SMT Divergence is detected.
In the images below, SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ and NYSE:ES form a low at 12:20 AM on November 12th. At 12:35 AM, the 12:20 AM low is taken out on $NQ. However, on NYSE:ES , price failed to take out this exact low at 12:35 AM. Thus, an SMT Divergence is detected, and a line is drawn between the two lows on $NQ.
NYSE:ES Chart:
SEED_ALEXDRAYM_SHORTINTEREST2:NQ Chart:
🔹 SMT Divergence Settings
The indicator includes settings that allow users to control how SMT Divergences are detected and displayed.
◇ Length
Length controls how sensitive the pivot detection is when finding highs and lows for SMT.
Lower Length: confirms swings with fewer bars, so more swings qualify.
Higher Length: requires more bars to confirm a swing, so fewer swings qualify.
◇ Divergence Length
The Divergence Length setting defines how many bars apart the two swing points may be for them to count as part of the same SMT Divergence.
Higher Values: The two instruments can form their swing highs or lows farther apart in time. As long as both swings occur within this wider bar window, the indicator compares them for divergence.
Lower Values: The two swing points must occur very close to each other.
◇ Show Last
This setting limits how many recent SMT Divergences are displayed on the chart. For example, setting Show Last to 1 will only show the most recent SMT Divergence, while higher values allow more historical SMT Divergences to remain visible on the chart.
◇ Divergence Ticker
Users can change the ticker used for detections. Since SMT Divergences occur by comparing two tickers, the inputted ticker within the settings will always be compared to the current selected ticker on your chart.
DASHBOARD:
The dashboard provides a live summary of all major components of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model. It updates every candle and displays the current state of each requirement used in the setup logic.
🔹 Real-Time Model Components
The state of each component is displayed with the following:
✔️ = condition is satisfied
❌ = condition is not satisfied
🐂 / 🐻 = current directional bias (bullish or bearish)
The dashboard actively tracks the following:
◇ Bias (🐂 Bullish, 🐻 Bearish, or Both)
Shows the current bias with a bull or bear emoji. If using automatic bias, the dashboard updates as soon as the session logic determines a direction.
◇ Liquidity Sweep
Displays ✔️ once a valid BSL Sweep (for shorts) or SSL Sweep (for longs) is detected.
Shows ❌ when no sweep is present.
◇ V Shape Recovery
Displays ✔️ when a confirmed V shape recovery forms after the sweep.
Shows ❌ until a valid V shape appears.
◇ Inversion Fair Value Gap (IFVG)
Shows ✔️ once a bullish or bearish IFVG forms in the correct direction.
Shows ❌ when no IFVG has yet confirmed.
◇ Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
Displays ✔️ when price is currently inside any enabled HTF FVG or taps a HTF FVG during a liquidity sweep.
Displays ❌ when price is not inside a HTF imbalance.
◇ Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity (DOL)
Shows ✔️ when a clear opposite-side draw is present in the model logic.
Shows ❌ if no clear opposite draw is detected.
◇ SMT Divergence
Shows ✔️ for 20 candles immediately after an SMT Divergence forms.
After 20 candles, it returns to ❌ unless a new SMT Divergence is detected.
🔹 Signal Information Display
When a valid long or short signal appears, the dashboard expands to show the full details of the setup, including:
Signal Rating
Entry Price
Stop-Loss Price
Breakeven Price
Take Profit 1 Price
Take Profit 2 Price
🔹 Trade Statistics Module
Users can enable a built-in statistics panel to view historical performance of signals across all ratings. The trade stats include:
A Signal Win Rate
A+ Signal Win Rate
A++ Signal Win Rate
Long Signal Win Rate
Short Signal Win Rate
Total Number of Trades Used in the Calculations
A trade is counted as a win if price reaches breakeven before stop-loss. A trade is counted as a loss if price hits stop-loss before breakeven.
🔹 Dashboard Customization
The dashboard includes several options to control its appearance and position:
Show Dashboard: Toggle the entire dashboard on or off
Dashboard Size: Choose the size of the dashboard
Dashboard Position: Choose the location of the dashboard on the chart
Trade Stats Text Color: Customize the color of the 2nd column outputs under the Trade Stats section in the dashboard
◇ Component Toggles
Users can enable or disable the display of any model component based on preference. Each of these items can be shown or hidden independently:
Setup Rating
Entry
Stop-Loss
Breakeven
Take Profit 1
Take Profit 2
Bias
Liquidity Sweep
Higher-Timeframe FVG Interaction
V Shape Recovery
Inversion FVG
Clear Opposite Draw on Liquidity
Trade Stats
These toggles only affect visual display. Disabling any of them does not affect the underlying indicator’s logic.
ALERTS:
The Inversion Fair Value Gap Model includes full alert functionality using AnyAlert(), allowing users to receive notifications in real time for all major model components and signal events.
Users can enable or disable each alert type in the “Alerts” section of the settings. After selecting which alerts they want active, they can create a single TradingView alert using the AnyAlert() condition. This will automatically trigger alerts for all enabled events as soon as they occur on the chart.
Available Alerts:
Long Signal
Short Signal
Breakeven Hit (BE)
Take Profit 1 Hit (TP1)
Take Profit 2 Hit (TP2)
Stop-Loss Hit (SL)
Liquidity Sweep Detected
SMT Divergence Detected
How to Receive Alerts:
Open the TradingView alert creation window.
Select the IFVG Model indicator as the alert condition.
Choose AnyAlert() from the condition dropdown.
Create the alert.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
TradingView has limitations when running features on multiple timeframes such as the HTF FVGs, which can result in the following restriction:
Computation Error:
The computation of using MTF features is very intensive on TradingView. This can sometimes cause calculation timeouts. When this occurs, simply force the recalculation by modifying one indicator’s settings or by removing the indicator and adding it to your chart again.
UNIQUENESS:
This indicator is unique because it organizes every part of the Inversion Fair Value Gap Model into one structured, rules based system. It detects liquidity sweeps, confirms V shape recoveries, identifies valid IFVGs, checks higher timeframe FVG taps, reads macro timing, and applies a session based directional bias. All of these components are evaluated in a fixed sequence so users always know exactly why a signal appears. Every part of the logic is customizable, including which liquidity types are used, which IFVGs qualify for signals, which time windows allow trades, the minimum risk to reward for a setup, and all visual elements on the chart. The tool also includes optional SMT Divergence detection, daily and weekly opening gaps, a live dashboard that shows the state of each model requirement, and optional signal performance statistics.
